1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
166 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 274215730 "scott"
169 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
170 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
171 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
182 by the \SpecialChar LyX
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
189 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
190 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
191 Documentation mailing list:
192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
194 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
206 \begin_inset Newline newline
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
214 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
216 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
220 \begin_inset Note Note
223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
224 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
225 \begin_inset Newline newline
230 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
238 \begin_layout Standard
239 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
240 LatexCommand tableofcontents
247 \begin_layout Chapter
251 \begin_layout Section
252 What is \SpecialChar LyX
256 \begin_layout Standard
258 is a document preparation system.
259 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
260 scripts, publishable books, business
261 letters and proposals,
262 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
266 It is unlike most other
267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
274 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
276 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 pt type, left justified, 5
293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
302 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
312 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
316 \begin_layout Standard
321 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
322 's philosophy: most importantly,
323 the format of all of the manuals.
324 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
325 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
326 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
329 \begin_layout Section
334 \begin_layout Standard
335 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
336 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
338 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
339 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
345 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
346 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
348 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
349 only a vertical scrollbar.
352 \begin_layout Standard
353 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
354 The first case is large images.
355 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
356 the image and use the option
367 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
370 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
373 \begin_layout Standard
374 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
375 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
383 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
390 \begin_layout Section
394 \begin_layout Standard
395 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
397 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
399 Just select the manual you want to read from the
406 \begin_layout Section
407 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
411 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
418 \begin_layout Standard
419 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
420 can be configured via the menu
422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
426 \begin_inset Index idx
431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
440 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
441 packages are available.
442 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
444 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
445 was installed on your system,
446 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
451 \begin_inset space \space{}
454 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
455 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
457 To force \SpecialChar LyX
458 to re-inspect your system use
460 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
464 \begin_inset Index idx
469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
470 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
476 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
477 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
480 \begin_layout Section
483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
485 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
492 \begin_layout Standard
493 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
494 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
495 installed but you will not be
497 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
498 or print your documents
502 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
503 Some \SpecialChar LyX
504 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
513 which can produce PDFs and the like.
516 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
521 every \SpecialChar LyX
522 document can still be output as plain text
523 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
529 \begin_layout Standard
530 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
532 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
536 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
537 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
540 \begin_layout Standard
541 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
542 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
543 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
546 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
554 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
555 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
558 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
562 \begin_inset Index idx
567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
568 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
576 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
583 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
587 \begin_layout Chapter
588 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
592 \begin_layout Section
593 Basic File Operations
594 \begin_inset Index idx
599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
608 \begin_layout Standard
613 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
614 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
617 \begin_layout Itemize
639 \begin_layout Itemize
655 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
661 \begin_layout Itemize
683 \begin_layout Itemize
691 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
695 \begin_layout Itemize
697 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
709 \begin_layout Itemize
721 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
725 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
735 \begin_layout Itemize
757 \begin_layout Itemize
769 arg "buffer-write-as"
773 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
777 \begin_layout Itemize
779 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
791 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
795 \begin_layout Itemize
797 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
805 \begin_layout Itemize
819 \begin_layout Itemize
833 \begin_layout Standard
834 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
835 few minor differences.
838 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
849 command lists the available templates.
850 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
851 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
852 and possibly propose text fragments
854 for the document, features
855 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
858 you would otherwise need to
859 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
861 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
865 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
869 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
877 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
884 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
888 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
896 \begin_layout Standard
897 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
929 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
930 to open a file or create a new one, that big
931 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
935 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
939 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
950 \begin_layout Standard
972 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
974 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
977 people work on the same document at the same time.
981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
982 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
985 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
990 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
991 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
993 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
995 \begin_inset Flex Emph
998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1001 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1010 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1015 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1023 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1034 \begin_inset space ~
1038 \begin_inset space ~
1043 will reload the document from disk.
1044 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1045 and want to restore it to the last save
1046 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1053 \begin_inset space ~
1058 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1059 them as your changes.
1062 \begin_layout Section
1063 Basic Editing Features
1064 \begin_inset Index idx
1069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1078 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1085 \begin_layout Standard
1086 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1087 can perform cut and paste operations
1088 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1089 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1090 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1091 editing features and how to access
1093 We will start with cut and paste.
1096 \begin_layout Standard
1097 As you might expect, the
1101 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1102 various other editing features.
1103 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1107 \begin_layout Itemize
1113 \begin_inset Index idx
1118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 \begin_layout Itemize
1153 \begin_inset Index idx
1158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1187 \begin_layout Itemize
1193 \begin_inset Index idx
1198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1223 \begin_layout Itemize
1227 \begin_inset space ~
1233 \begin_layout Itemize
1237 \begin_inset space ~
1243 \begin_layout Itemize
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset Index idx
1262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1271 \begin_inset Index idx
1276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1291 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1301 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1307 \begin_layout Standard
1308 The first three are self-explanatory.
1309 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1310 and other programs using
1331 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1332 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1337 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1338 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1339 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1340 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1341 into individual cells.
1345 \begin_inset space ~
1350 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1351 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1355 \begin_layout Standard
1359 \begin_inset space ~
1364 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1366 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1381 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1382 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1383 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1392 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1393 text which is often meaningless.)
1396 \begin_layout Standard
1400 \begin_inset space ~
1403 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1405 \begin_inset space ~
1409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1413 \begin_inset space ~
1422 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1423 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1424 is inserted as one paragraph.
1425 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1429 \begin_inset space ~
1434 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1435 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1441 \begin_inset space ~
1444 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1458 \begin_inset space ~
1461 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1464 paste from the primary selection.
1465 This is normally the currently selected text.
1468 \begin_layout Standard
1471 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1473 \begin_inset space ~
1477 \begin_inset space ~
1485 \begin_inset space ~
1489 \begin_inset space ~
1495 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1497 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1501 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1504 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1509 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1512 \begin_inset space ~
1523 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1525 \begin_inset space ~
1529 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1531 \begin_inset space ~
1539 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1553 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1557 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1561 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1565 \begin_inset space ~
1577 arg "word-find-backward"
1580 shortcut) to search backwards
1584 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1585 Even if you close the widget,
1594 arg "word-find-backward"
1597 will search further.
1602 \begin_layout Standard
1604 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1609 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1612 \begin_inset space ~
1617 field and searches the next match.
1623 \begin_inset space ~
1628 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1630 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1632 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1636 \begin_layout Standard
1638 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1639 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1642 \begin_layout Itemize
1645 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1651 \begin_inset space ~
1657 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1660 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1661 If the toggle is set, searching for
1662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1673 will not match the word
1674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1687 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1691 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1698 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1702 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1707 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1708 to only find complete words, e.
1709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1713 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1742 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1746 \begin_layout Itemize
1749 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1754 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1757 \begin_layout Itemize
1760 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1765 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1777 \begin_layout Itemize
1779 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1784 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1785 been reached without asking.
1786 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1787 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1788 so you need to put it back manually.
1791 \begin_layout Standard
1792 \paragraph_spacing single
1794 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1795 The widget also has a
1799 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1800 widget), hiding replace and options.
1802 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
1804 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1809 button brings you back to the full size.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 \paragraph_spacing single
1816 also offers an advanced
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1823 \begin_inset space ~
1828 feature that is described in section
1829 \begin_inset space ~
1833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1835 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1842 \begin_layout Standard
1843 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1844 \begin_inset space \space{}
1848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1856 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1858 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1863 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1870 \begin_layout Standard
1874 arg "inset-select-all"
1877 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1878 When the cursor is inside an inset
1881 arg "inset-select-all"
1884 selects the content of the inset.
1888 arg "inset-select-all"
1891 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1892 then to the whole document.
1896 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1899 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1903 \begin_layout Section
1905 \begin_inset Index idx
1910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1917 \begin_inset Index idx
1922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1931 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1938 \begin_layout Standard
1939 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1941 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1944 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1947 or the toolbar button
1954 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1956 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1959 or the toolbar button
1966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1973 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1982 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1983 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1992 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1993 This is a consequence of the 100
1994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1997 step undo limit mentioned above.
2000 \begin_layout Standard
2009 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2011 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
2015 \begin_layout Section
2017 \begin_inset Index idx
2022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2031 \begin_layout Standard
2032 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2035 \begin_layout Enumerate
2040 \begin_layout Itemize
2045 once anywhere in the edit window.
2046 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2050 \begin_layout Enumerate
2055 \begin_layout Itemize
2062 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2065 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2068 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2069 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2071 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2072 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2078 \begin_layout Itemize
2079 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2082 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2089 \begin_layout Enumerate
2090 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2094 \begin_layout Standard
2095 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2096 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2100 \begin_layout Section
2102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2104 name "sec:Navigating"
2109 \begin_inset Index idx
2114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2123 \begin_layout Standard
2125 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2128 \begin_layout Itemize
2133 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2134 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2137 \begin_layout Itemize
2138 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2140 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2142 \begin_inset space ~
2147 or by the toolbar button
2150 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2156 \begin_layout Itemize
2157 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2159 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2162 and use the same menu to return to them.
2163 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2166 \begin_layout Standard
2170 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2175 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2176 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2178 \begin_inset space ~
2183 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2184 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2185 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2186 last editing position.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2194 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2198 \begin_layout Subsection
2200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2202 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2207 \begin_inset Index idx
2212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2214 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2229 \begin_inset Index idx
2234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2243 \begin_layout Standard
2244 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2245 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2246 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2247 \begin_inset space ~
2251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2253 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2257 ), notes, or citations (see section
2258 \begin_inset space ~
2262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2264 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2269 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2274 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2275 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2276 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2277 dialog and to modify the citation.
2280 \begin_layout Standard
2285 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2286 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2288 Labels and References
2290 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2299 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2302 \begin_layout Standard
2303 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2304 control the display.
2309 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2310 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2315 option keeps it in the current view state.
2316 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2317 \begin_inset space ~
2320 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2321 \begin_inset space ~
2324 3, the subsections of sections
2325 \begin_inset space ~
2328 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2333 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2334 \begin_inset space ~
2338 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2348 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2351 \begin_layout Standard
2358 button refreshes the TOC (
2359 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2361 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2365 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2367 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2371 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2375 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2379 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2383 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2385 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2389 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2391 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2395 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2397 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2401 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2405 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2407 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2411 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2415 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2419 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2423 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2427 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2431 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2435 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2439 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2441 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2445 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2459 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2460 For example, you can move section
2461 \begin_inset space ~
2465 \begin_inset space ~
2468 2.4 or after section
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2474 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2487 (or the corresponding key bindings
2495 ) you can change the level of sections.
2496 You can make section
2497 \begin_inset space ~
2501 \begin_inset space ~
2505 \begin_inset space ~
2511 \begin_layout Standard
2512 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2513 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2516 \begin_layout Subsection
2517 Horizontal Scrolling
2518 \begin_inset Index idx
2523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2525 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2535 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2554 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2559 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2560 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2561 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2570 \begin_layout Itemize
2572 is used on a small tablet computer
2575 \begin_layout Itemize
2576 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2588 \begin_inset space ~
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2602 Math constructs with long command names
2605 \begin_layout Standard
2606 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2607 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2609 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2610 window so that table
2611 \begin_inset space ~
2615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2617 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2622 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2624 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2625 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2628 \begin_layout Standard
2629 \begin_inset Float table
2636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2637 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2642 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2646 Horizontal scrolling test.
2654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2656 \begin_inset Tabular
2657 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2658 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2659 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2660 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2703 \begin_layout Section
2704 Input/Word Completion
2705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2707 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2712 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 \begin_inset Index idx
2729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2760 \begin_layout Standard
2762 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2764 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2765 is used to propose completions.
2768 \begin_layout Standard
2769 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2772 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2777 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2784 \begin_inset space ~
2788 \begin_inset space ~
2793 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2797 \begin_inset space ~
2802 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2803 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2807 \begin_inset space ~
2813 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2814 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2815 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2816 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2819 \begin_layout Standard
2821 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2822 completions available.
2827 key to accept a proposed completion.
2828 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2829 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2830 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2833 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2840 \begin_layout Standard
2841 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2842 ing options for text.
2844 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2846 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2848 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2851 he special math option
2855 enables characters to be composed.
2857 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2859 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2863 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2866 you want to insert the character
2867 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2871 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2874 input the characters
2875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2887 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2889 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2893 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2895 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2900 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2902 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2905 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2908 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2910 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2913 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2918 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2920 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2924 's installation folder.
2926 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2927 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2934 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2939 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2940 In the example above,
2945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2977 \begin_layout Section
2979 \begin_inset Index idx
2984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2991 \begin_inset Index idx
2996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2998 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3013 \begin_inset Index idx
3018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3020 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3037 \begin_layout Standard
3038 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3052 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3055 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3059 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3060 \begin_inset space ~
3064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3066 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3073 \begin_layout Standard
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3085 \begin_inset space ~
3106 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3110 \begin_layout Labeling
3111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3115 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3116 LatexCommand nomenclature
3118 description "Tabulator key"
3125 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3127 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3128 \begin_inset space ~
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3134 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3141 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3145 , especially section
3146 \begin_inset space ~
3150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3152 reference "subsec:Lists"
3158 If you are still confused, look in the
3163 \begin_inset Newline newline
3171 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3172 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3176 \begin_layout Labeling
3177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3181 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3182 LatexCommand nomenclature
3184 description "Escape key"
3192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3199 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3200 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3203 \begin_layout Labeling
3204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3209 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3210 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3214 \begin_layout Standard
3215 There are three modifier keys:
3218 \begin_layout Labeling
3219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3237 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3238 LatexCommand nomenclature
3240 description "Control key"
3245 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3246 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3250 \begin_layout Itemize
3259 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3262 \begin_layout Itemize
3271 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3274 \begin_layout Itemize
3283 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3287 \begin_layout Labeling
3288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3306 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3307 LatexCommand nomenclature
3309 description "Shift key"
3314 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3315 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3318 \begin_layout Labeling
3319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3338 LatexCommand nomenclature
3340 description "Alt or Meta key"
3345 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3346 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3347 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3353 \begin_inset Newline newline
3356 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3358 menu accelerator keys
3361 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3362 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3366 \begin_layout Standard
3367 For example, the sequence
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 \begin_inset space ~
3378 \begin_inset space ~
3384 \begin_inset space ~
3392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3411 \begin_inset space ~
3417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3427 \begin_layout Standard
3432 manual lists all other things bound to the
3440 \begin_layout Standard
3441 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3443 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3445 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3446 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3448 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3449 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3450 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3452 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3468 followed by a capital
3475 \begin_layout Chapter
3478 \begin_inset Index idx
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3486 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3503 \begin_layout Section
3505 \begin_inset Index idx
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3529 \begin_layout Subsection
3533 \begin_layout Standard
3534 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3535 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3536 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3537 numbering schemes, and so on.
3538 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3539 and format the title of your document differently.
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3547 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3548 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3549 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3550 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3551 picks one for you by default.
3552 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3555 \begin_layout Subsection
3557 \begin_inset Index idx
3562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3581 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3588 \begin_layout Standard
3589 You can select a class using the
3591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3596 \begin_inset Index idx
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3618 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3622 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3626 \begin_layout Standard
3627 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3632 \begin_layout Description
3633 Article for basic articles
3636 \begin_layout Description
3637 Report for basic reports
3640 \begin_layout Description
3641 Book for writing a book
3644 \begin_layout Description
3645 Letter for US-style letters
3648 \begin_layout Standard
3649 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3650 only uses if you have installed
3651 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3652 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3653 distributions will include
3655 Here are some of the classes.
3656 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3658 Special Document Classes
3667 \begin_layout Description
3668 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3671 \begin_layout Description
3672 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3676 \begin_layout Description
3677 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3681 \begin_layout Description
3682 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3683 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3684 There are three article layouts available.
3685 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3686 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3687 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3688 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3693 sequential numbering
3694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3697 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3698 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3699 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3700 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3703 \begin_layout Description
3704 Beamer Layout for presentations
3707 \begin_layout Description
3708 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3709 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3710 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3711 with \SpecialChar LyX
3715 \begin_layout Description
3716 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3719 \begin_layout Description
3721 \begin_inset space ~
3724 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3727 \begin_layout Description
3728 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3731 \begin_layout Description
3732 Foils Used to make transparencies
3735 \begin_layout Description
3736 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3737 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3738 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3739 with \SpecialChar LyX
3743 \begin_layout Description
3744 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3745 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3748 \begin_layout Description
3749 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3752 \begin_layout Description
3753 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3756 \begin_layout Description
3757 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3758 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3759 (Is used by this document.)
3762 \begin_layout Description
3763 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3766 \begin_layout Description
3767 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3770 \begin_layout Description
3775 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3776 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3778 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3782 \begin_layout Description
3783 Slides Used to make transparencies
3786 \begin_layout Description
3788 \begin_inset space ~
3791 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3792 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3795 \begin_layout Description
3796 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3799 \begin_layout Standard
3800 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3802 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3804 Special Document Classes
3811 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3812 of the document classes.
3815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3819 \begin_layout Standard
3820 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3822 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3823 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3827 \begin_inset Index idx
3832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3834 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3857 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3858 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3860 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3863 \begin_layout Standard
3866 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3871 , are highly specialized.
3873 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3874 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3875 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3876 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3877 by some document class.
3878 There are just too many of them.
3879 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3882 \begin_layout Standard
3883 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3891 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3892 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3893 document class for a new file.
3895 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3898 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3905 manual for information on how to install them.
3906 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3912 \begin_layout Standard
3913 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3914 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3915 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3916 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3917 class files to be used for dissertation
3918 s submitted to those universities.
3919 The \SpecialChar LyX
3920 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3922 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3926 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3932 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3939 name "subsec:Modules"
3944 \begin_inset Index idx
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 \begin_layout Standard
3969 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3970 chosen document class.
3971 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3972 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3983 \begin_inset Index idx
3988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4005 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
4009 \begin_layout Standard
4010 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4011 packages or file format converters that are not always
4012 installed by default.
4014 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
4015 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4016 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
4017 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
4019 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4020 file without the missing prerequisites.
4021 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
4022 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4025 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4029 \begin_inset Index idx
4034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4035 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4042 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4046 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4050 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4059 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4061 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4072 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4075 \begin_layout Standard
4076 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4086 will advise you about these things.
4094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4098 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4103 \begin_inset Index idx
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4110 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4127 \begin_layout Standard
4128 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4129 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4130 : They are intended to be used in
4131 a variety of different documents.
4132 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
4133 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4134 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
4135 need a specific inset or
4136 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4138 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4141 style only that one time.
4142 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4144 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4162 manual for information on how to use it.
4165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4169 \begin_layout Standard
4170 Each class has a default set of options.
4171 Here's a quick table describing them:
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4181 \begin_layout Standard
4183 \begin_inset Tabular
4184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4185 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4645 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4651 \begin_layout Standard
4652 You're probably also wondering what
4653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4657 \begin_inset space ~
4661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4665 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4666 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4671 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4676 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4686 headings, there are also
4694 headings, and so on.
4695 We will describe these headings fully in section
4696 \begin_inset space ~
4700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4702 reference "subsec:Headings"
4709 \begin_layout Subsection
4711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4713 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4718 \begin_inset Index idx
4723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4725 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4740 \begin_inset Index idx
4745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4747 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4774 \begin_inset space ~
4782 \begin_inset space ~
4787 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4789 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4790 doesn't support special options you want to
4791 use for your document.
4792 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4793 -class and its options, you have to read
4797 \begin_layout Standard
4799 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4803 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4807 \begin_inset space ~
4814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4820 \begin_inset space ~
4825 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4826 You can choose between the following five options:
4829 \begin_layout Labeling
4830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4835 Use default page style of current class.
4838 \begin_layout Labeling
4839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4844 No page numbers or headings.
4847 \begin_layout Labeling
4848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4856 \begin_layout Labeling
4857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4862 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4863 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4864 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4865 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4868 \begin_layout Labeling
4869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4874 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4875 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4881 \begin_inset Index idx
4886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4889 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4904 How they are defined is explained in section
4905 \begin_inset space ~
4909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4911 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4918 \begin_layout Standard
4919 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4920 \begin_inset space ~
4924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4926 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4933 \begin_layout Subsection
4934 Paper Size and Orientation
4935 \begin_inset Index idx
4940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4959 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4966 \begin_layout Standard
4967 You can find the following options in the menu
4970 \begin_inset space ~
4977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4981 \begin_inset Index idx
4986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4988 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5005 \begin_layout Labeling
5006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5010 \begin_inset space ~
5015 What size paper to print on.
5020 \begin_layout Itemize
5026 \begin_layout Itemize
5032 \begin_layout Itemize
5038 \begin_layout Itemize
5044 \begin_layout Itemize
5047 US letter, US legal, US executive
5050 \begin_layout Itemize
5056 \begin_layout Itemize
5063 \begin_layout Labeling
5064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5069 To choose whether to output as
5080 \begin_layout Labeling
5081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5085 \begin_inset space ~
5090 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5091 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5094 \begin_layout Subsection
5096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5098 name "subsec:Margins"
5103 \begin_inset Index idx
5108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5110 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5125 \begin_inset Index idx
5130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5139 \begin_layout Standard
5140 Paper margins are set in the menu
5142 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5146 \begin_inset Index idx
5151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5153 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5170 \begin_layout Standard
5171 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
5172 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
5173 the paper format and the font size into account.
5176 \begin_layout Subsection
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5181 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
5182 has to convert everything into the new
5184 That includes the paragraph environments.
5185 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
5186 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5187 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
5189 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5198 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
5200 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
5201 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
5202 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
5205 \begin_layout Section
5206 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5207 \begin_inset Index idx
5212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5214 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5231 \begin_layout Subsection
5233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5235 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5242 \begin_layout Standard
5243 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
5244 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5247 \begin_layout Standard
5248 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5249 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5250 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5251 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5255 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5261 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5262 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5263 language than English.
5265 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5269 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5270 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5271 into \SpecialChar LyX
5273 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5276 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5278 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5279 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5280 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5288 goes to produce a printable file.
5293 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5295 gives you the ability globally to change
5299 these pre-coded spacings.
5300 We will explain more later.
5303 \begin_layout Subsection
5304 Paragraph Separation
5305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5307 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5312 \begin_inset Index idx
5317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5344 \begin_inset space ~
5352 \begin_inset space ~
5359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5363 \begin_inset Index idx
5368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5370 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5384 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5387 \begin_layout Subsection
5391 \begin_layout Standard
5392 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5395 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5397 \begin_inset space ~
5402 dialog and toggle the
5405 \begin_inset space ~
5410 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5413 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5417 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5418 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5422 \begin_layout Standard
5423 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5424 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5427 \begin_layout Subsection
5429 \begin_inset Index idx
5434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5436 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5453 \begin_layout Standard
5456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5460 \begin_inset Index idx
5465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5467 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5481 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5485 \begin_inset space ~
5494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5495 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5501 \begin_inset Index idx
5506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5509 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5523 installed to use this feature.
5528 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5532 \begin_inset space ~
5537 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5538 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5541 \begin_layout Section
5542 Paragraph Environments
5543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5545 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5550 \begin_inset Index idx
5555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5557 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 \begin_inset Index idx
5577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5578 Paragraph environments
5586 \begin_layout Subsection
5590 \begin_layout Standard
5591 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5594 \begin_layout Standard
5603 } \SpecialChar ldots
5613 \begin_inset Newline newline
5616 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5618 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5619 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5620 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5629 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5632 \begin_layout Standard
5633 A paragraph environment is simply a
5634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5641 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5642 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5643 scheme, labels, and so on.
5644 Additionally, you can
5645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5652 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5653 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5654 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5655 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5657 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5659 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5662 \begin_layout Standard
5663 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5664 \begin_inset Graphics
5665 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5671 at the left end of the toolbar.
5673 will change the environment of the
5677 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5678 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5679 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5682 \begin_layout Standard
5691 create a new paragraph using the
5695 paragraph environment.
5697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5704 because if you are in one of these environments:
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5713 \begin_layout Itemize
5719 \begin_layout Itemize
5725 \begin_layout Itemize
5731 \begin_layout Itemize
5737 \begin_layout Itemize
5743 \begin_layout Itemize
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5751 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5755 , rather than resetting it to
5760 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5761 \begin_inset space ~
5765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5767 reference "sec:Nesting"
5774 \begin_layout Subsection
5778 \begin_layout Standard
5779 The default paragraph environment is
5784 It creates a plain paragraph.
5786 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5787 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5788 this manual) are in the
5795 \begin_layout Standard
5796 You can nest a paragraph using the
5800 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5808 \begin_layout Subsection
5810 \begin_inset Index idx
5815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5835 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5836 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5845 for thanks or contact information.
5846 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5847 places all of this on a separate page
5848 along with today's date.
5849 For other types of documents, the title
5850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5857 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5860 \begin_layout Standard
5862 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5876 Here's how you use them:
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5880 Put the title of your document in the
5887 \begin_layout Itemize
5888 Put the author name in the
5895 \begin_layout Itemize
5896 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5897 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5903 Note that using this environment is optional.
5904 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5905 will automatically insert today's date.
5906 If you don't want a date, use the option
5908 Suppress default date on front page
5912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5913 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5915 \begin_inset space ~
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5924 You can use footnotes to insert
5925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5932 or contact information.
5935 \begin_layout Subsection
5937 \begin_inset Index idx
5942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5951 name "subsec:Headings"
5958 \begin_layout Standard
5959 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5961 takes care of the numbering for you.
5964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5966 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5973 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5990 \begin_layout Standard
5991 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6001 \begin_layout Enumerate
6007 \begin_layout Enumerate
6013 \begin_layout Enumerate
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6025 \begin_layout Enumerate
6031 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 \begin_layout Standard
6039 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
6040 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6041 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
6042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6044 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6046 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6052 \begin_layout Standard
6053 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6054 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
6055 You group the book into chapters.
6057 does a similar grouping:
6060 \begin_layout Itemize
6065 is divided into either
6076 \begin_layout Itemize
6088 \begin_layout Itemize
6100 \begin_layout Itemize
6112 \begin_layout Itemize
6124 \begin_layout Itemize
6136 \begin_layout Standard
6137 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6145 Not all document types use the
6149 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6154 is the top-level heading.
6162 \begin_layout Standard
6167 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
6168 labels it with its number,
6169 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
6171 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
6173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6185 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6192 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6210 The unnumbered section headings have a
6211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6218 at the end of their name.
6219 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
6220 the table of contents, see section
6221 \begin_inset space ~
6225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6234 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6235 Changing the Numbering
6236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6238 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6245 \begin_layout Standard
6246 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
6247 in the Table of Contents.
6248 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
6250 Just as certain classes start with
6264 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6274 This is something you can change.
6277 \begin_layout Standard
6280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6284 \begin_inset Index idx
6289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6291 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6308 \begin_inset space ~
6312 \begin_inset space ~
6317 you will see two counters.
6322 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6323 numbers a section heading.
6324 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
6328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6329 Short Titles of Headings
6330 \begin_inset Index idx
6335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6337 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6352 \begin_inset Argument 1
6355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6364 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6372 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
6373 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6374 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
6375 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6378 \begin_layout Standard
6380 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6381 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6382 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6383 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6388 \begin_inset space ~
6394 This will insert a box labeled
6395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6399 \begin_inset space ~
6403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6406 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6407 This also works for captions inside floats.
6408 There can only be one short title per title.
6411 \begin_layout Standard
6412 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6419 \begin_layout Standard
6420 The following information applies to all section headings:
6423 \begin_layout Itemize
6424 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6427 \begin_layout Itemize
6428 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6431 \begin_layout Itemize
6432 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6435 \begin_layout Itemize
6436 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6439 \begin_layout Subsection
6443 \begin_layout Standard
6445 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6459 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6460 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6461 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6462 the text they contain.
6463 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6471 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6474 \begin_layout Standard
6475 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6484 when you start a new paragraph.
6485 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6489 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6490 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6491 have to change back to the
6495 environment yourself.
6498 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6507 \begin_inset Index idx
6512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6521 \begin_layout Standard
6522 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6523 time for the differences.
6532 are identical except for one difference:
6536 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6545 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6548 \begin_layout Standard
6549 Here's an example of the
6562 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6564 See – no indentation!
6568 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6569 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6570 the other paragraph.
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 Here's another example, this time in the
6581 \begin_layout Quotation
6587 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6588 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6589 the first line, then
6593 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6597 you were quoting other text.
6600 \begin_layout Quotation
6601 Here's a new paragraph.
6602 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6603 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6606 \begin_layout Standard
6607 As the examples show,
6611 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6612 They should put quotes in the
6617 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6621 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6626 \begin_inset Index idx
6631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6633 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6669 \begin_layout Standard
6674 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6680 \begin_inset Newline newline
6683 Which I did not rehearse!
6687 It could be much worse.
6688 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6690 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6691 indented a bit more than the first.
6692 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6698 \begin_inset Newline newline
6701 And make things look fine
6702 \begin_inset Newline newline
6708 arg "newline-insert newline"
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6719 does not indent both margins.
6720 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6721 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6724 arg "newline-insert newline"
6730 \begin_layout Subsection
6732 \begin_inset Index idx
6737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6753 \begin_layout Standard
6755 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6765 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6766 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6775 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6776 lets you provide your own label.
6777 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6778 describing some general features of all four of them.
6781 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6785 \begin_layout Standard
6786 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6788 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6789 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6798 reset the environment to
6802 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6803 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6804 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6808 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6812 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6820 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6821 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6822 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6824 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6825 you read all of section
6826 \begin_inset space ~
6830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6832 reference "sec:Nesting"
6839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6841 \begin_inset Index idx
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6873 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6877 paragraph environment.
6878 It has the following properties:
6881 \begin_layout Itemize
6882 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6886 \begin_layout Itemize
6888 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6891 \begin_layout Itemize
6892 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6896 \begin_layout Itemize
6897 The items can have any length.
6899 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6900 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6907 \begin_layout Itemize
6912 environment inside another
6916 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6920 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6924 \begin_layout Itemize
6926 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6929 \begin_layout Itemize
6931 \begin_inset space ~
6935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6937 reference "sec:Nesting"
6941 for a full explanation of nesting.
6945 \begin_layout Standard
6946 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6955 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6960 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6963 \begin_layout Itemize
6964 The label for the first level
6968 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6972 \begin_layout Itemize
6973 The label for the second level is a dash.
6977 \begin_layout Itemize
6978 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6982 \begin_layout Itemize
6983 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6987 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 Back out to the third level.
6992 \begin_layout Itemize
6993 Back to the second level.
6997 \begin_layout Itemize
6998 Back to the outermost level.
7001 \begin_layout Standard
7002 These are the default labels for an
7007 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7012 dialog in the submenu
7017 \begin_inset Index idx
7022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7042 \begin_layout Standard
7043 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7044 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
7046 \begin_inset space ~
7050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7052 reference "sec:Nesting"
7059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7061 \begin_inset Index idx
7066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7068 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7085 name "sec:Enumerate"
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7097 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7098 It has these properties:
7101 \begin_layout Enumerate
7102 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7106 \begin_layout Enumerate
7107 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7111 \begin_layout Enumerate
7113 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7116 \begin_layout Enumerate
7121 environment resets the counter to one.
7124 \begin_layout Enumerate
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7138 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7139 Items can have any length.
7142 \begin_layout Enumerate
7143 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7146 \begin_layout Enumerate
7147 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7150 \begin_layout Enumerate
7151 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7155 \begin_layout Standard
7164 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7166 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7167 labels the four different levels in an
7174 \begin_layout Enumerate
7175 The first level of an
7179 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7183 \begin_layout Enumerate
7184 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7188 \begin_layout Enumerate
7189 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7193 \begin_layout Enumerate
7194 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7197 \begin_layout Enumerate
7198 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
7203 \begin_layout Enumerate
7204 Back to the third level
7208 \begin_layout Enumerate
7209 Back to the second level.
7213 \begin_layout Enumerate
7214 Back to the outermost level.
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7218 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7222 environment, see section
7223 \begin_inset space ~
7227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7229 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7234 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7239 There is more to nesting
7243 environments than we've stated here.
7244 You should read section
7245 \begin_inset space ~
7249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7251 reference "sec:Nesting"
7255 to learn more about nesting.
7258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7260 \begin_inset Index idx
7265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7267 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7285 Unlike the previous two environments, the
7289 list has no fixed label.
7290 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
7292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7299 of the first line as the label.
7303 \begin_layout Description
7304 Example: This is an example of the
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7313 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
7317 \begin_layout Standard
7319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7326 it is meant that the first usage of the
7330 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
7332 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7333 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7337 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7346 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7352 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7354 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7356 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7360 \begin_inset space ~
7366 \begin_inset space ~
7370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7372 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7376 for more information.) Here is an example:
7379 \begin_layout Description
7381 \begin_inset space ~
7384 Example: This one shows how to use a
7385 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7389 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7393 \begin_inset space ~
7405 \begin_layout Description
7406 Usage: You should use the
7410 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7411 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
7413 It's not a good idea to use a
7417 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7418 You're better off using
7430 paragraphs into them.
7433 \begin_layout Description
7434 Nesting: You can nest
7438 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
7442 \begin_layout Standard
7443 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
7444 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
7445 them from the first line.
7448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7450 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7457 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7479 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7480 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7484 \begin_layout Standard
7493 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7495 Here are its properties:
7498 \begin_layout Labeling
7499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7504 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7513 of each line as the item label.
7518 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7519 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a
7520 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
7522 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
7525 space as described above.
7528 \begin_layout Labeling
7529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7530 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7531 uses different margins for the item label and the
7532 body of the item text.
7533 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7534 label width plus a little extra space.
7537 \begin_layout Labeling
7538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7543 width \SpecialChar LyX
7544 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7545 If the label width is larger, the label
7546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7553 into the first line.
7554 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7555 margin of the rest of the item text.
7558 \begin_layout Labeling
7559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7561 \begin_inset space ~
7564 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7569 environment has the same left margin.
7570 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7576 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7578 \begin_inset space ~
7583 dialog (toolbar button
7586 arg "layout-paragraph"
7593 \begin_inset space ~
7598 determines the default label width.
7599 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7608 multiple times instead.
7609 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7619 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 every time you alter a label in a
7632 \begin_inset Newline newline
7635 The predefined default width is the length of
7636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7644 \begin_inset space ~
7650 \begin_layout Standard
7655 list the same way as the
7659 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7665 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7674 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7675 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7677 \begin_inset space ~
7681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7683 reference "sec:Nesting"
7687 to learn about nesting.
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7691 There is yet another feature of the
7695 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7696 left-justifies the item labels by
7698 You can use additional
7701 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
7706 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7707 justifies the item label.
7711 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
7713 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
7715 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
7720 are documented in section
7721 \begin_inset space ~
7725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7727 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7732 Here are some examples:
7735 \begin_layout Labeling
7736 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7737 Left The default for
7744 \begin_layout Labeling
7745 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7746 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7752 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
7757 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7760 \begin_layout Labeling
7761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7762 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7766 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7772 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
7777 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7780 \begin_layout Subsection
7782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7784 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7789 \begin_inset Index idx
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7813 \begin_layout Standard
7814 The features described in this section require that the module
7816 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7818 is loaded in the document settings.
7819 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7825 \begin_inset Index idx
7830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7851 Custom Enumerate Lists
7852 \begin_inset Index idx
7857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7859 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7869 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7886 \begin_layout Standard
7888 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7894 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7895 There you add the command
7898 \begin_layout Standard
7906 \begin_layout Standard
7918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7919 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7920 Code, look at section
7921 \begin_inset space ~
7925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7927 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7940 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7947 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7948 For capital Roman numerals replace
7960 in the command above.
7961 For Arabic numerals use
7969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7976 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7991 \begin_layout Standard
7993 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8001 You can only number 26
8002 \begin_inset space ~
8005 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8014 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
8015 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
8018 \begin_layout Standard
8019 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8022 \begin_layout Enumerate
8023 \begin_inset Argument 1
8026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8052 \begin_layout Enumerate
8053 \begin_inset Argument 1
8056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8079 \begin_layout Enumerate
8084 \begin_layout Enumerate
8085 \begin_inset Argument 1
8088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8112 \begin_layout Enumerate
8113 \begin_inset Argument 1
8116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8142 \begin_layout Standard
8143 For this list these commands were used:
8146 \begin_layout Standard
8157 \begin_inset Newline newline
8165 \begin_inset Newline newline
8173 \begin_inset Newline newline
8183 \begin_layout Standard
8190 makes the label emphasized and
8199 \begin_layout Standard
8200 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8208 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
8209 lists until you change the definition.
8217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8219 \begin_inset Index idx
8224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8226 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8236 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8253 \begin_layout Standard
8254 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8257 \begin_layout Enumerate
8258 \begin_inset Argument 1
8261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8280 \begin_inset Note Note
8283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8284 goes back to default numbering
8292 \begin_layout Enumerate
8296 \begin_layout Standard
8300 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8305 To resume an enumeration, use the style
8311 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8312 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8313 to indicate that it is a resumed list
8314 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8315 , but in the output.
8320 \begin_layout Standard
8321 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8329 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8338 \begin_layout Standard
8339 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
8341 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8342 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
8343 of a normal enumeration.
8344 There, insert the command
8347 \begin_layout Standard
8353 \begin_layout Standard
8358 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8362 \begin_layout Enumerate
8366 \begin_layout Enumerate
8370 \begin_layout Standard
8371 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8374 \begin_layout Enumerate
8375 \begin_inset Argument 1
8378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8394 This enumeration starts at 4
8397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8406 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8423 \begin_layout Standard
8424 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
8426 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8429 \begin_layout Itemize
8433 \begin_layout Itemize
8434 with standard spacing
8437 \begin_layout Standard
8438 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
8440 Add there the command
8444 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8447 \begin_layout Itemize
8448 \begin_inset Argument 1
8451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8470 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 \begin_layout Itemize
8478 \begin_layout Standard
8479 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8486 \begin_inset Index idx
8491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8494 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8509 For more information see its documentation,
8510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
8523 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
8524 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
8525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8528 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
8531 \begin_layout Enumerate
8532 \begin_inset Argument 1
8535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8543 parindent, labelsep=2cm
8556 \begin_layout Enumerate
8557 with negative indentation
8560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8561 Further Customization
8562 \begin_inset Index idx
8567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8569 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8586 \begin_layout Standard
8587 You can also change the style of description lists.
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8597 \begin_layout Standard
8598 changes the description label font, the command
8601 \begin_layout Standard
8607 \begin_layout Standard
8608 sets the list style.
8611 \begin_layout Standard
8612 An example where the command
8615 \begin_layout Standard
8620 itshape, style=nextline
8623 \begin_layout Standard
8627 \begin_layout Description
8629 \begin_inset space ~
8633 \begin_inset Argument 1
8636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8642 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8644 itshape, style=nextline
8654 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8655 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8659 \begin_layout Description
8661 \begin_inset space ~
8664 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8665 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8666 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8669 \begin_layout Standard
8670 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8676 \begin_inset Index idx
8681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8684 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8699 For more information see its documentation
8700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8710 \begin_layout Subsection
8712 \begin_inset Index idx
8717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8728 \begin_inset space ~
8731 Address: An Overview
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8735 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8736 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8744 \begin_inset space ~
8750 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8751 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8752 gags on the document.
8753 In contrast, you can use the
8760 \begin_inset space ~
8765 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8766 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8770 \begin_layout Standard
8771 Of course, you're not limited to using
8778 \begin_inset space ~
8787 \begin_inset space ~
8792 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8793 some European academic papers.
8796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8800 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8807 \begin_layout Standard
8812 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8813 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8817 \begin_inset space ~
8822 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8823 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8824 Here's an example of each:
8827 \begin_layout Right Address
8829 \begin_inset Newline newline
8833 \begin_inset Newline newline
8837 \begin_inset Newline newline
8840 When is it? What is today?
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset space ~
8853 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8855 the largest block of text on a single line.
8856 Here's an example of the
8863 \begin_layout Address
8865 \begin_inset Newline newline
8868 Where do I send this
8869 \begin_inset Newline newline
8872 Your post office and country
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 As you can see, both
8883 \begin_inset space ~
8888 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8893 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8894 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8900 This makes sense, since
8908 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8909 Thus, you have to use
8916 arg "newline-insert newline"
8921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8922 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8924 \begin_inset space ~
8928 \begin_inset space ~
8933 ) to start a new line in an
8940 \begin_inset space ~
8948 \begin_layout Subsection
8952 \begin_layout Standard
8953 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8954 or list of references.
8956 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8961 \begin_inset Index idx
8966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8980 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8981 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8982 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8983 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8987 in anything else or vice versa.
8993 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8994 The book document classes ignores the
8998 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
9002 in a letter document class.
9005 \begin_layout Standard
9010 environment does several things for you.
9011 First, it puts the centered label
9012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9020 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
9022 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
9023 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
9024 the subsequent text.
9025 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9027 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9032 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9036 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9037 The new paragraph will still be in the
9042 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
9043 finish entering the abstract of your document.
9046 \begin_layout Standard
9047 \begin_inset Float figure
9054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9056 \begin_inset Graphics
9057 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9065 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9070 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9091 \begin_layout Standard
9092 We would love to demonstrate the
9096 environment, but since this document is in the
9097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9104 class, we can't do this.
9105 We inserted it therefore as figure
9106 \begin_inset space ~
9110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9112 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9117 If you have never heard of an
9118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9125 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
9128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9130 \begin_inset Index idx
9135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9144 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9156 environment is used to list references.
9157 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
9158 only use it at the end of the document.
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9171 When you first open a
9175 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
9176 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
9177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9192 depending on the document class.
9193 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9194 Each paragraph of the
9198 environment is a bibliography entry.
9203 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9204 Each new paragraph is still in the
9211 \begin_layout Standard
9212 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
9213 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9215 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9217 handling, have a look at section
9218 \begin_inset space ~
9222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9224 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9231 \begin_layout Subsection
9232 Special Environments
9235 \begin_layout Standard
9237 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
9238 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9246 \begin_inset Index idx
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9261 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9268 \begin_layout Standard
9274 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9276 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9281 key as a fixed whitespace.
9285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9296 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9300 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9304 \begin_inset space ~
9308 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9310 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9315 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9333 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
9336 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
9339 arg "newline-insert newline"
9356 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9357 So, when you finish using the
9362 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9363 Also, you can nest the
9368 environment inside of others.
9371 \begin_layout Standard
9372 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9375 \begin_layout Itemize
9379 arg "newline-insert newline"
9382 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9387 \begin_inset space \space{}
9397 arg "newline-insert newline"
9403 \begin_layout Itemize
9407 arg "newline-insert newline"
9417 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
9423 \begin_layout Itemize
9424 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
9425 You must put at least one
9429 in any line you want blank.
9430 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
9434 \begin_layout Itemize
9435 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
9439 since that will insert
9444 You get the typewriter double quotes with
9447 arg "self-insert \""
9453 \begin_layout Standard
9457 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9461 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9465 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9469 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9473 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9474 printf("Hello World!
9479 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9483 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9487 \begin_layout Standard
9488 This is just the standard
9489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9499 \begin_layout Standard
9505 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
9507 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
9508 as if you used a typewriter.
9509 \begin_inset Index idx
9514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9515 Paragraph environments
9520 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
9523 Program Code Listings
9528 \begin_inset space ~
9536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9540 \begin_inset Index idx
9545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9554 \begin_layout Standard
9559 environment is similar to the
9564 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
9565 computer console text.
9570 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
9584 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
9585 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
9587 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
9590 space) and you can have empty lines.
9603 \begin_layout Itemize
9604 have a certain language and a text style
9607 \begin_layout Itemize
9608 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
9609 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
9610 and \SpecialChar TeX
9614 \begin_layout Standard
9615 Because of these properties
9619 works like a typewriter.
9623 \begin_layout Verbatim
9628 \begin_layout Verbatim
9632 The following 2 lines are empty:
9635 \begin_layout Verbatim
9639 \begin_layout Verbatim
9643 \begin_layout Verbatim
9645 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9650 \begin_layout Standard
9655 environment is identical to
9659 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9660 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9667 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9672 \begin_layout Section
9673 Nesting Environments
9674 \begin_inset Index idx
9679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9705 \begin_layout Subsection
9709 \begin_layout Standard
9711 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9713 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9715 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9717 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9738 \begin_layout Enumerate
9742 \begin_layout Enumerate
9747 \begin_layout Enumerate
9751 \begin_layout Standard
9752 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9753 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9755 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9757 \begin_inset space ~
9761 \begin_inset space ~
9769 \begin_inset space ~
9773 \begin_inset space ~
9778 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9780 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9783 arg "depth-increment"
9789 arg "depth-decrement"
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9809 arg "depth-decrement"
9813 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9814 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9818 \begin_layout Standard
9819 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9820 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9821 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9822 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9823 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9826 \begin_layout Standard
9827 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9829 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9831 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9834 \begin_layout Subsection
9835 What You Can and Can't Nest
9838 \begin_layout Standard
9839 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9840 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9843 \begin_layout Standard
9844 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9845 than a simple yes or no.
9846 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9849 \begin_layout Itemize
9850 Completely unnestable
9853 \begin_layout Itemize
9854 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9858 \begin_layout Itemize
9859 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9863 \begin_layout Standard
9864 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9865 environments have them:
9868 \begin_layout Description
9869 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9870 Can't nest into them.
9874 \begin_layout Itemize
9880 \begin_layout Itemize
9886 \begin_layout Itemize
9892 \begin_layout Itemize
9898 \begin_layout Itemize
9905 \begin_layout Description
9907 \begin_inset space ~
9910 Nestable You can nest them.
9911 You can nest other things into them.
9915 \begin_layout Itemize
9921 \begin_layout Itemize
9927 \begin_layout Itemize
9933 \begin_layout Itemize
9939 \begin_layout Itemize
9945 \begin_layout Itemize
9951 \begin_layout Itemize
9957 \begin_layout Itemize
9964 \begin_layout Itemize
9970 \begin_layout Itemize
9977 \begin_layout Description
9978 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9979 You can't nest anything into them.
9983 \begin_layout Itemize
9989 \begin_layout Itemize
9995 \begin_layout Itemize
10001 \begin_layout Itemize
10007 \begin_layout Itemize
10013 \begin_layout Itemize
10019 \begin_layout Itemize
10025 \begin_layout Itemize
10031 \begin_layout Itemize
10037 \begin_layout Itemize
10043 \begin_layout Itemize
10049 \begin_layout Itemize
10055 \begin_layout Itemize
10061 \begin_layout Itemize
10065 \begin_inset space ~
10071 \begin_layout Itemize
10078 \begin_layout Standard
10079 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10087 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
10097 \begin_inset space ~
10100 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
10101 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
10102 nested section headings violate this.
10110 \begin_layout Subsection
10111 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
10112 \begin_inset Index idx
10117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10119 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10136 \begin_layout Standard
10137 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
10138 affected by nesting anyhow.
10142 \begin_layout Itemize
10146 \begin_layout Itemize
10150 \begin_layout Itemize
10154 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10164 Figures and tables in
10168 are not affected by this.
10173 Have a look at section
10174 \begin_inset space ~
10178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10180 reference "sec:Floats"
10184 for more information about
10191 \begin_layout Standard
10193 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10194 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
10198 \begin_layout Standard
10199 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
10200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10207 of its own, it behaves just like a
10208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10215 paragraph environment.
10216 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
10220 \begin_layout Standard
10221 Here's an example with a table:
10224 \begin_layout Enumerate
10229 \begin_layout Enumerate
10230 This is (a) and it's nested.
10234 \begin_layout Standard
10235 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10241 \begin_layout Standard
10243 \begin_inset Tabular
10244 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10245 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10246 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10331 \begin_layout Standard
10332 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10339 \begin_layout Enumerate
10341 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10345 \begin_layout Enumerate
10349 \begin_layout Standard
10350 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
10353 \begin_layout Enumerate
10358 \begin_layout Enumerate
10359 This is (a) and it's nested.
10363 \begin_layout Standard
10364 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10370 \begin_layout Standard
10372 \begin_inset Tabular
10373 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10374 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10376 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 \begin_layout Standard
10461 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10467 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 In fact, it's not nested at all.
10477 \begin_layout Enumerate
10481 \begin_layout Standard
10482 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
10483 item of a new list!
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
10490 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 This is (a) and it's nested.
10502 \begin_layout Standard
10503 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10509 \begin_layout Standard
10511 \begin_inset Tabular
10512 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10513 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10514 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10515 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10600 \begin_layout Standard
10601 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10607 \begin_layout Enumerate
10609 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
10616 \begin_layout Enumerate
10620 \begin_layout Standard
10621 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
10627 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10628 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
10632 \begin_layout Subsection
10633 Usage and General Features
10636 \begin_layout Standard
10637 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10638 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 is the innermost possible depth.
10648 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10651 \begin_layout Enumerate
10652 level #1 – outermost
10656 \begin_layout Enumerate
10661 \begin_layout Enumerate
10666 \begin_layout Enumerate
10671 \begin_layout Itemize
10676 \begin_layout Itemize
10685 \begin_layout Standard
10686 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10687 both of them in the example.
10688 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10698 For example, if we tried to nest another
10703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10710 , we would get errors.
10713 \begin_layout Subsection
10715 \begin_inset Index idx
10720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10722 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10739 \begin_layout Standard
10740 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10741 We have several examples of nested environments.
10742 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10747 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10750 \begin_layout Labeling
10751 \labelwidthstring MMM
10752 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10761 \begin_layout Labeling
10762 \labelwidthstring MMM
10763 #2-a This is level #2.
10764 We created it by using
10767 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10773 arg "depth-increment"
10780 \begin_layout Labeling
10781 \labelwidthstring MMM
10782 #3-a This is level #3.
10783 This time, we just enter
10790 arg "depth-increment"
10794 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10798 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10804 arg "depth-increment"
10811 \begin_layout Standard
10816 environment, nested inside of
10817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10825 So, it's at level #4.
10826 We did this by entering
10829 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10835 arg "depth-increment"
10838 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10843 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10859 \begin_layout Standard
10864 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10867 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10873 \begin_layout Labeling
10874 \labelwidthstring MMM
10875 #4-a This is level #4.
10879 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10882 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10887 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10891 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10896 keep nesting things inside
10897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10908 \begin_layout Labeling
10909 \labelwidthstring MMM
10910 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10915 \begin_layout Labeling
10916 \labelwidthstring MMM
10917 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10918 and this is level #6.
10919 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10923 \begin_layout Labeling
10924 \labelwidthstring MMM
10925 #5-b Back to level #5.
10929 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10935 arg "depth-decrement"
10942 \begin_layout Labeling
10943 \labelwidthstring MMM
10947 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10953 arg "depth-decrement"
10956 , we're back at level #4.
10960 \begin_layout Labeling
10961 \labelwidthstring MMM
10962 #3-b Back to level #3.
10963 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10967 \begin_layout Labeling
10968 \labelwidthstring MMM
10969 #2-b Back to level #2.
10973 \begin_layout Labeling
10974 \labelwidthstring MMM
10975 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10976 After this sentence, we will enter
10980 and change the paragraph environment back to
10987 \begin_layout Standard
10988 We could have also used the
11004 environment in place of the
11009 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11013 Example 2: Inheritance
11016 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11017 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
11020 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11029 arg "depth-increment"
11033 \begin_inset Newline newline
11036 which, we will change to the
11044 \begin_layout Enumerate
11049 environment, at level #2.
11052 \begin_layout Enumerate
11053 Notice how the nested
11057 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11061 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
11065 \begin_layout Standard
11066 We ended this example by entering
11071 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11075 and reset the nesting depth by using
11078 arg "depth-decrement"
11084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11085 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
11094 \begin_inset Argument 1
11097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
11106 \begin_layout Enumerate
11107 This is level #1, in an
11111 paragraph environment.
11112 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11116 \begin_layout Enumerate
11121 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11127 arg "depth-increment"
11131 Now, what happens if we nest an
11135 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
11136 label be? An asterisk?
11140 \begin_layout Itemize
11150 environment, even though it's at level #3.
11151 So, its label is a bullet.
11152 (We got here by using
11155 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11161 arg "depth-increment"
11164 , then changing the environment to
11172 \begin_layout Itemize
11173 Here's level #4, produced using
11176 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11182 arg "depth-increment"
11186 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11191 \begin_layout Enumerate
11193 to get to level #5.
11194 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11199 Notice the type of numbering, it is
11203 , because we are in the
11211 environment (that is, it is an
11226 \begin_layout Enumerate
11231 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
11232 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11236 \begin_layout Enumerate
11237 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
11240 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11243 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11246 \begin_layout Enumerate
11250 arg "depth-decrement"
11253 to decrease the depth after the next
11256 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11263 \begin_layout Enumerate
11265 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11270 \begin_layout Enumerate
11272 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
11273 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
11277 \begin_layout Enumerate
11278 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
11287 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
11292 reset the counter for the label.
11296 \begin_layout Enumerate
11300 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11306 arg "depth-decrement"
11309 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
11310 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
11311 into the twofold-nested
11319 \begin_layout Enumerate
11320 The same thing happens if we do another
11323 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11329 arg "depth-decrement"
11332 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
11335 \begin_layout Standard
11336 Lastly, we reset the environment to
11341 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
11352 The number of other
11356 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
11363 The same rule applies for the
11367 environment, as well.
11370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11371 Example 4: Going Bonkers
11374 \begin_layout Enumerate
11375 We're going to go totally nuts now.
11376 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
11377 the same detail with how we did it.
11386 \begin_layout Standard
11394 arg "depth-increment"
11401 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
11402 the example in parentheses someplace.
11403 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
11404 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
11405 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
11409 \begin_layout Enumerate
11414 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
11418 \begin_layout Verse
11419 Now we will add verse.
11420 \begin_inset Newline newline
11423 It will get much worse.
11424 \begin_inset Newline newline
11434 arg "depth-increment"
11444 \begin_layout Verse
11445 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
11446 \begin_inset Newline newline
11449 Bippitey boppitey boo!
11450 \begin_inset Newline newline
11456 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11464 \begin_layout Verse
11465 Here comes a table:
11469 \begin_layout Standard
11470 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11476 \begin_layout Standard
11478 \begin_inset Tabular
11479 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11480 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11481 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11482 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
11487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
11525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11567 \begin_layout Verse
11571 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11581 arg "depth-increment"
11587 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11593 \begin_inset Newline newline
11601 arg "depth-decrement"
11608 \begin_layout Enumerate
11613 : level #1) This is another item.
11614 Note that selecting a
11618 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
11619 3 times to put the table inside the
11626 \begin_layout Quotation
11627 We're now ending the
11631 list and changing to
11636 We're still at level #1.
11637 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11638 The next set of paragraphs is a
11639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11646 We will nest both the
11653 \begin_inset space ~
11658 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
11662 for the letter body.
11666 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11669 to preserve the depth.
11670 Remember that you need to use
11673 arg "newline-insert newline"
11676 to create multiple lines inside the
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_layout Right Address
11695 \begin_inset Newline newline
11698 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11699 \begin_inset Newline newline
11705 \begin_layout Address
11707 \begin_inset space ~
11713 \begin_layout Quotation
11714 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11718 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11719 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11720 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11721 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11722 as soon as possible.
11723 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11726 \begin_layout Quotation
11727 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11728 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11729 with your order, along with payment.
11732 \begin_layout Quotation
11733 We thank you again for your patience.
11736 \begin_layout Address
11738 \begin_inset Newline newline
11745 \begin_layout Quotation
11746 That ends that example!
11749 \begin_layout Standard
11750 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11751 gives you a lot of power with just
11753 We could have easily nested an
11774 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11777 \begin_layout Subsection
11779 \begin_inset Index idx
11784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11803 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11810 \begin_layout Standard
11811 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11813 For example you need two different enumerations:
11816 \begin_layout Enumerate
11821 \begin_layout Enumerate
11826 \begin_layout Enumerate
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11831 \begin_inset Separator plain
11837 \begin_layout Itemize
11843 \begin_layout Standard
11844 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11850 \begin_layout Enumerate
11854 \begin_layout Enumerate
11858 \begin_layout Enumerate
11862 \begin_layout Standard
11863 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11864 list item and use the menu
11866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11867 Separated <Name> Above
11871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11872 Separated <Name> Below
11875 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11876 ) and before or behind it the
11878 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11881 \begin_layout Standard
11882 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11883 (red arrow in LyX).
11884 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11885 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11888 \begin_layout Standard
11889 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11892 arg "paragraph-break"
11899 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11902 \begin_layout Section
11903 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11904 \begin_inset Index idx
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11920 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11922 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11923 be broken at the end of a line.
11924 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11928 \begin_layout Subsection
11930 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
11932 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
11936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11938 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11943 \begin_inset Index idx
11948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11950 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11955 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
11957 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
11973 \begin_layout Standard
11975 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
11977 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
11980 space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11981 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11983 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
11986 break the line at that point.
11987 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11990 \begin_layout Quote
11991 Further documentation is given in section
11992 \begin_inset Newline newline
11996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11998 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12005 \begin_layout Standard
12006 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a
12007 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12009 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12027 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12037 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12039 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12044 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12045 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12047 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12049 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12053 \begin_inset space ~
12061 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12067 \begin_layout Subsection
12069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12071 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12076 \begin_inset Index idx
12081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12083 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12100 \begin_layout Standard
12101 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12104 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12108 The length units are listed in Appendix
12109 \begin_inset space ~
12113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12115 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12122 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12124 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12126 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12130 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12134 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12139 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12143 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12150 \begin_inset Index idx
12155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12157 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12162 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12164 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
12182 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
12183 at the ends of sentences.
12184 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12185 automatically takes care about this.
12186 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
12187 followed by a period; see section
12188 \begin_inset space ~
12192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12194 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12199 To insert a normal space, select
12201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12202 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12206 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12218 arg "space-insert normal"
12224 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12226 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12237 \begin_inset Index idx
12242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12244 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12261 \begin_layout Standard
12263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12267 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12274 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12279 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
12281 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
12285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12289 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
12290 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
12291 inside abbreviations:
12294 \begin_layout Quote
12296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12300 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
12303 \begin_layout Standard
12304 or between values and units.
12305 Compare for example this:
12306 \begin_inset Newline newline
12310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12314 \begin_inset Newline newline
12317 10 kg (normal space
12318 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
12324 \begin_layout Standard
12325 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
12327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12328 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12330 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
12332 \begin_inset space ~
12338 \begin_inset space ~
12346 arg "space-insert thin"
12352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12356 \begin_layout Standard
12357 You can also insert the following space types:
12360 \begin_layout Description
12362 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12370 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12374 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
12378 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12382 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
12384 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
12387 space between the arrows.
12388 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
12392 \begin_layout Description
12394 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
12396 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
12400 \begin_inset space ~
12403 space A line with a
12404 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12408 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
12412 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12416 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
12418 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
12421 space between the arrows.
12424 \begin_layout Description
12426 \begin_inset space ~
12430 \begin_inset space ~
12433 space A line with a
12434 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12438 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
12442 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12445 negative thin space between the arrows.
12448 \begin_layout Description
12450 \begin_inset space ~
12454 \begin_inset space ~
12457 space A line with a
12458 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12462 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
12466 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12469 negative medium space between the arrows.
12472 \begin_layout Description
12474 \begin_inset space ~
12478 \begin_inset space ~
12481 space A line with a
12482 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12486 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
12490 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12493 negative thick space between the arrows.
12496 \begin_layout Description
12498 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
12500 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
12502 \begin_inset space ~
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12516 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12520 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
12524 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12528 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
12530 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
12532 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_inset space ~
12542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12545 em) space between the arrows.
12548 \begin_layout Description
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12558 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12562 \begin_inset space \quad{}
12566 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12570 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
12572 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12583 em) space between the arrows.
12586 \begin_layout Description
12588 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
12590 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
12592 \begin_inset space ~
12598 \begin_inset space ~
12602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12606 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12610 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
12614 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12618 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
12620 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
12622 \begin_inset space ~
12626 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
12630 \begin_inset space ~
12634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12637 em) space between the arrows.
12640 \begin_layout Description
12642 \begin_inset space ~
12646 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12650 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
12655 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12662 cm space between the arrows.
12665 \begin_layout Standard
12667 \begin_inset space ~
12671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12673 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
12677 lists the different space sizes.
12680 \begin_layout Standard
12681 \begin_inset Float table
12688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12689 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12694 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12698 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12708 \begin_inset Tabular
12709 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12710 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12711 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12712 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12714 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12725 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12767 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
12769 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
12770 Non-breaking Normal
12777 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12792 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12810 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
12812 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12827 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
12828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12833 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12839 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12844 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12855 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
12856 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12861 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12867 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12872 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12893 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12898 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
12900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12904 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12920 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12929 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12944 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12953 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12968 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12973 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
12975 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
12979 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
12981 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
12985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12993 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12998 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13000 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13008 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13010 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13026 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13054 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13059 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13061 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13073 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13099 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13101 \begin_inset Index idx
13106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13108 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13125 \begin_layout Standard
13126 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13127 feature for adding extra space
13128 in a uniform fashion.
13130 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13133 Fill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals the
13134 remaining space between the left and right margins.
13135 If there is more than one H
13136 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13139 Fill on a line, they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13142 \begin_layout Standard
13143 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13146 \begin_layout Quote
13148 This is on the left side
13149 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13152 This is on the right
13155 \begin_layout Quote
13158 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13162 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13168 \begin_layout Quote
13171 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13175 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13179 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13185 \begin_layout Standard
13186 That was an example in the
13192 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13196 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13200 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13203 is one in a standard paragraph.
13204 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
13208 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13211 \begin_layout Standard
13213 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13215 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13218 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13221 \begin_inset space ~
13226 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13231 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13235 \begin_inset space ~
13241 \begin_layout Standard
13243 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13253 \begin_layout Standard
13255 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13259 \begin_inset space ~
13265 \begin_layout Standard
13267 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13271 \begin_inset space ~
13277 \begin_layout Standard
13279 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
13281 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
13285 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
13286 (= opened downwards)
13289 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
13293 \begin_inset space ~
13299 \begin_layout Standard
13301 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
13303 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
13307 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
13311 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
13315 \begin_inset space ~
13321 \begin_layout Standard
13322 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13331 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
13333 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
13336 is at the beginning of a line, and
13340 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
13343 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
13345 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
13348 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
13349 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
13350 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
13354 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
13359 option in the space dialog.
13367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13371 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
13376 \begin_inset Index idx
13381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13383 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13400 \begin_layout Standard
13401 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
13402 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
13405 \begin_layout Standard
13406 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13409 What is correct English?:
13410 \begin_inset Newline newline
13414 \begin_inset Newline newline
13418 \begin_inset space ~
13421 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
13422 \begin_inset Newline newline
13426 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13437 \begin_inset Newline newline
13441 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13452 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13458 \begin_layout Standard
13460 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
13461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13465 \begin_inset space ~
13469 \begin_inset space ~
13473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13477 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
13479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13480 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13484 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
13486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13490 \begin_inset space ~
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13501 into the phantom inset (note the space after
13502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13510 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
13511 That is why it is named
13512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13520 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
13521 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
13525 \begin_layout Subsection
13527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13529 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
13534 \begin_inset Index idx
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13541 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13558 \begin_layout Standard
13559 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
13561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13562 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13564 \begin_inset space ~
13570 There you find the following sizes:
13573 \begin_layout Standard
13577 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
13585 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
13593 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
13598 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
13599 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
13603 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
13608 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
13610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13611 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13619 \begin_inset Index idx
13624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13626 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13640 for the paragraph separation.
13641 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
13644 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
13652 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
13658 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
13662 \begin_layout Standard
13664 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
13673 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
13674 size including line spacing.
13679 \begin_layout Standard
13683 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
13689 \begin_inset Index idx
13694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13696 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13710 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
13711 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
13716 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
13717 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
13721 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
13729 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
13734 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
13738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13742 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
13747 s are described in section
13748 \begin_inset space ~
13752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13754 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13763 If there are several
13766 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
13771 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13772 You can therefore use
13775 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
13780 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13783 \begin_layout Standard
13788 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13789 \begin_inset space ~
13793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13795 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13802 \begin_layout Standard
13803 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13813 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
13814 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13826 \begin_layout Subsection
13827 Paragraph Alignment
13828 \begin_inset Index idx
13833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13835 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13852 \begin_layout Standard
13853 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13858 dialog (toolbar button
13861 arg "layout-paragraph"
13865 There are five possibilities:
13868 \begin_layout Itemize
13876 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13882 \begin_layout Itemize
13890 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13896 \begin_layout Itemize
13904 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13910 \begin_layout Itemize
13918 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13924 \begin_layout Itemize
13932 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13938 \begin_layout Standard
13939 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
13940 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
13941 the left and right margins.
13942 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
13945 \begin_layout Standard
13947 This paragraph is right aligned,
13950 \begin_layout Standard
13952 this one is centered,
13955 \begin_layout Standard
13957 this one is left aligned.
13960 \begin_layout Subsection
13962 \begin_inset Index idx
13967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13969 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13986 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13993 \begin_layout Standard
13994 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13995 does the page breaks in your document, you can
13996 force a page break where you want one.
13997 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13998 is good at page breaking.
13999 Only if you use a lot of
14003 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
14004 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14007 \begin_layout Standard
14008 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
14009 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14013 have to change the page breaking.
14016 \begin_layout Standard
14017 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
14019 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14022 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14024 \begin_inset space ~
14030 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
14032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14033 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14035 \begin_inset space ~
14040 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
14042 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
14043 on which only the last few lines are absent.
14046 \begin_layout Standard
14047 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
14048 at the top of a page.
14049 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
14051 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
14052 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
14053 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14057 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14061 to learn more about
14068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14072 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14077 \begin_inset Index idx
14082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14084 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14101 \begin_layout Standard
14102 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
14103 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14104 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
14105 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
14106 it, if necessary by adding pages.
14109 \begin_layout Standard
14110 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14115 \begin_inset space ~
14121 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
14123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14126 \begin_inset space ~
14130 \begin_inset space ~
14135 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
14136 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
14137 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14143 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14144 Suppressing Page Breaks
14147 \begin_inset Index idx
14152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14154 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14158 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14173 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14177 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14182 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14186 \begin_layout Standard
14188 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14189 To discourage page break at
14190 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14192 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14193 certain point you can use
14197 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14199 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14202 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14204 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14211 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14212 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
14213 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
14214 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14219 \begin_layout Subsection
14221 \begin_inset Index idx
14226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14235 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14242 \begin_layout Standard
14243 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
14245 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14248 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14250 \begin_inset space ~
14254 \begin_inset space ~
14262 arg "newline-insert newline"
14266 Another type that is inserted via the menu
14268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14271 \begin_inset space ~
14275 \begin_inset space ~
14283 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
14286 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
14288 This is useful to avoid
14289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14296 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
14299 \begin_layout Standard
14300 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
14301 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14303 very good at line breaking.
14304 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
14305 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
14306 \begin_inset space ~
14310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14312 reference "sec:Quote"
14317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14319 reference "sec:Verse"
14324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14326 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
14333 \begin_layout Subsection
14335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14337 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
14342 \begin_inset Index idx
14347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14356 \begin_layout Standard
14358 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14369 \begin_layout Standard
14373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14374 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14376 \begin_inset space ~
14381 you can insert horizontal lines.
14382 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
14383 of the current text line or the paragraph.
14384 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
14387 \begin_layout Standard
14389 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14400 \begin_layout Section
14401 Characters and Symbols
14404 \begin_layout Standard
14405 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
14406 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
14407 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
14409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14415 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
14419 for information on how this is done.
14422 \begin_layout Standard
14423 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
14428 dialog via the menu
14430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14431 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
14437 \begin_layout Standard
14438 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14446 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
14447 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
14449 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
14457 \begin_layout Section
14458 Fonts and Text Styles
14459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14461 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
14468 \begin_layout Subsection
14470 \begin_inset Index idx
14475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14477 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14494 \begin_layout Standard
14495 There are two types of fonts:
14498 \begin_layout Description
14500 \begin_inset space ~
14504 \begin_inset Index idx
14509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14511 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14525 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
14526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14530 characters) in the font.
14531 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
14532 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
14533 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
14534 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
14535 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
14536 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
14537 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
14538 \begin_inset Newline newline
14541 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
14542 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
14543 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
14544 sizes than at small ones.
14545 \begin_inset Newline newline
14559 \begin_inset space ~
14567 \begin_layout Description
14569 \begin_inset space ~
14573 \begin_inset Index idx
14578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14580 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14594 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
14595 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
14596 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
14597 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
14598 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
14599 image manipulation program.
14600 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
14601 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
14602 \begin_inset space ~
14605 pixels high up to 34
14606 \begin_inset space ~
14609 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
14610 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
14611 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
14613 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
14614 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
14615 \begin_inset Newline newline
14618 Bitmap fonts are named
14621 \begin_inset space ~
14626 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
14629 \begin_layout Standard
14630 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
14631 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
14632 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
14633 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
14634 use scalable fonts.
14637 \begin_layout Standard
14638 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
14641 \begin_layout Standard
14642 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
14644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
14646 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
14649 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
14650 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
14651 font, to emphasize text you use an
14652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14660 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
14662 In \SpecialChar LyX
14663 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
14667 \begin_layout Subsection
14670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14672 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14679 \begin_layout Standard
14680 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14681 used its own fonts.
14682 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
14683 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14686 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14687 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
14688 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
14689 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
14690 to a word processor.
14691 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
14692 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14693 files are very portable across
14694 different machines.
14695 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
14696 has increased a lot
14697 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
14700 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
14702 \begin_inset space ~
14706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14708 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
14713 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
14714 code in the document
14715 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
14718 \begin_layout Standard
14719 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
14720 engines that are also able directly
14721 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14723 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14725 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
14727 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
14728 that is installed on your system.
14729 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
14732 \begin_layout Standard
14733 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14741 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
14742 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
14750 \begin_layout Subsection
14751 Document Font and Font size
14752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14754 name "subsec:Document-Font"
14759 \begin_inset Index idx
14764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14766 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14781 \begin_inset Index idx
14786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14788 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14805 \begin_layout Standard
14806 You can set the document fonts in the
14808 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14812 \begin_inset Index idx
14817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14819 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14838 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
14839 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
14842 \begin_inset space ~
14851 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
14853 \begin_inset space ~
14856 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
14859 \begin_layout Standard
14864 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14865 This requires that you use
14877 as the output format, i.
14878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14882 \begin_inset space \space{}
14885 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14886 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14887 installed (see section
14888 \begin_inset space ~
14892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14894 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14899 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14901 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14902 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14904 \begin_inset space ~
14907 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
14908 cannot determine the family.
14909 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
14910 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14913 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
14916 \begin_layout Standard
14917 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14918 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
14923 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14929 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14931 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
14933 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
14936 font encoding, this is
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
14938 , depending on the document language,
14941 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
14942 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14950 \begin_inset space ~
14956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
14967 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset space ~
14981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14989 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
14993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15010 European Computer Modern
15013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15021 However, some classes set different default fonts.
15024 \begin_layout Standard
15029 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
15030 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15035 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15038 \begin_inset space ~
15043 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
15049 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
15050 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
15053 \begin_layout Itemize
15057 \begin_inset space ~
15062 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15075 \begin_inset space ~
15080 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15081 community in order to replace
15085 as the default font.
15086 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15087 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15104 One difference is improved kerning.
15112 \begin_layout Itemize
15113 If you do not like the look of
15121 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
15122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15126 \begin_inset space ~
15132 \begin_inset space ~
15142 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15143 \begin_inset space ~
15146 serif and typewriter fonts,
15150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15151 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15158 \begin_inset space ~
15167 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
15168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15172 \begin_inset space \space{}
15180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15184 \begin_inset space \space{}
15190 \begin_inset space ~
15198 \begin_inset space ~
15208 but you can also select your own.
15209 \begin_inset Newline newline
15212 The differences between roman,
15215 \begin_inset space ~
15224 fonts are explained in section
15225 \begin_inset space ~
15229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15231 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15236 \begin_inset Newline newline
15242 \begin_inset space ~
15247 was originally designed for newspapers.
15248 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
15249 into the small newspaper columns.
15253 \begin_inset space ~
15258 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
15261 \begin_layout Standard
15262 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
15275 Some classes provide additional sizes.
15280 depends on the class you are using.
15281 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
15284 \begin_layout Standard
15285 Note that the font size is the
15290 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
15291 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
15292 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
15293 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
15296 \begin_inset space ~
15302 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
15303 \begin_inset space ~
15307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15309 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15316 \begin_layout Standard
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15325 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
15327 \begin_inset space ~
15330 serif or typewriter.
15335 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
15345 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
15348 \begin_layout Standard
15353 LaTeX font encoding
15355 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
15356 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15362 \begin_inset Index idx
15367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15370 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15385 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
15387 \begin_inset space ~
15391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15393 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
15400 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
15401 Unless you have specific reasons, use
15402 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
15406 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
15414 \begin_layout Standard
15415 With some fonts, the checkboxes
15417 Use Old Style Figures
15421 Use True Small Caps
15424 These are extra features some fonts provide.
15427 Use Old Style Figures
15429 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
15431 Old style figures are the numerals (0
15432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15439 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
15443 Use True Small Caps
15445 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
15446 of scaled capitals.
15447 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
15448 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
15449 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
15453 \begin_layout Standard
15455 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
15456 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
15457 provided by the font package (or the
15461 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
15466 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
15472 \begin_layout Standard
15477 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
15478 a font to display the script characters.
15482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15483 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15489 \begin_inset Index idx
15494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15497 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15511 So this has no effect for the document language
15527 \begin_layout Standard
15530 Enable micro-typographic extensions
15532 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
15533 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15539 \begin_inset Index idx
15544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15547 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15565 \begin_layout Standard
15568 Disallow line breaks after dashes
15570 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
15574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15575 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15576 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15582 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
15583 \begin_inset space ~
15587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15589 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
15599 \begin_layout Standard
15600 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
15604 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15612 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
15617 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
15618 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
15620 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
15622 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
15625 dialog, see section
15626 \begin_inset space ~
15630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15632 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
15644 \begin_layout Subsection
15648 \begin_layout Standard
15649 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
15650 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
15652 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
15653 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
15654 choose a math font in the dialog
15656 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15660 \begin_inset Index idx
15665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15667 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15682 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
15683 automatically selects a math font.
15684 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
15685 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
15688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15694 \begin_inset space ~
15700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15705 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
15706 document font is available.
15709 \begin_layout Standard
15710 Note that the math font will not be used for
15714 (which is inserted with the shortcut
15720 or by the insertion of the command
15727 Also note that some math fonts are sans
15728 \begin_inset space ~
15732 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
15733 while the math characters do not.
15735 \begin_inset space ~
15738 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
15741 \begin_inset space ~
15749 \begin_inset space ~
15754 in the document font settings.
15757 \begin_layout Standard
15758 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
15759 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
15760 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
15761 font (in most cases
15762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15768 \begin_inset space ~
15774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15777 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
15778 variant of the document's class default font (in most
15780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15786 \begin_inset space ~
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15798 \begin_layout Subsection
15800 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
15802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
15806 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
15808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15810 name "subsec:charstyles"
15817 \begin_inset Index idx
15822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15829 \begin_inset Index idx
15834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15843 \begin_layout Standard
15844 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
15845 automatically changes the
15846 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
15849 style for certain paragraph environments.
15851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
15852 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
15854 This is where we meet the concept of
15860 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
15862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
15866 \begin_layout Standard
15868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
15873 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
15875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
15888 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
15894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15897 e., available with all document classes.
15898 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
15902 for specific purposes.
15903 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
15906 \begin_layout Standard
15908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
15909 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15919 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15923 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
15924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15936 — you customized the
15941 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
15942 among them, encourage the use of
15954 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
15955 \begin_inset space ~
15959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15961 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15966 Rather than fiddling with
15970 , they encourage the use of
15974 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15979 \begin_inset Quotes els
15983 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15986 ), not their form (
15987 \begin_inset Quotes els
15991 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15995 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15996 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
15997 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15998 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15999 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16000 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
16006 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16010 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
16011 With a semantic markup (such as
16015 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
16020 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16022 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
16023 of a document, using different markup semantics.
16026 \begin_layout Standard
16028 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16029 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
16030 by \SpecialChar LyX
16036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16038 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16039 Builtin Text Styles
16040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16042 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16049 \begin_layout Standard
16051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16052 The two builtin text styles can be
16053 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16057 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16061 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16062 both of these styles
16065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16069 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16071 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16079 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16085 \begin_layout Standard
16090 style, do one of the following:
16093 \begin_layout Itemize
16094 click on the toolbar button
16103 \begin_layout Itemize
16104 use the key binding
16111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16115 \begin_layout Itemize
16117 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16121 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16123 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16125 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16133 arg "dialog-show character"
16137 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16141 arg "dialog-show character"
16145 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16146 as described in section
16147 \begin_inset space ~
16151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16153 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16158 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
16168 \begin_layout Standard
16170 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
16172 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
16176 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
16180 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
16182 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
16186 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
16194 style is already active, they deactivate it.
16197 \begin_layout Standard
16198 One typically uses the
16202 style for proper names.
16204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16211 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
16213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16217 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
16221 \begin_layout Standard
16223 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
16228 is producing text in
16232 , but the definition can be changed.
16237 \begin_layout Standard
16239 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
16241 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
16249 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
16256 \begin_layout Itemize
16257 clicking on the toolbar button
16266 \begin_layout Itemize
16267 using the keybindings
16274 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
16278 \begin_layout Itemize
16280 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16284 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
16286 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
16288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16296 arg "dialog-show character"
16300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16304 arg "dialog-show character"
16308 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
16309 as described in section
16310 \begin_inset space ~
16314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16316 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16321 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
16331 \begin_layout Standard
16336 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
16340 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
16343 packages use a different font
16344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
16345 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16351 \begin_layout Standard
16352 We've been using the
16356 style all over the place in this document.
16357 Here's one more example:
16360 \begin_layout Quotation
16364 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
16366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
16372 \begin_layout Standard
16373 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
16374 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
16375 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
16376 the common tendency to overuse
16377 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
16379 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
16384 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
16386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
16390 \begin_layout Standard
16392 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
16393 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
16394 only as font changes and integrated in the
16402 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
16405 always reset to the default font using the key binding
16412 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
16414 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
16418 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
16421 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16423 \begin_inset space ~
16426 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16428 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16438 arg "dialog-show character"
16444 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16446 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
16452 arg "dialog-show character"
16456 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
16464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16466 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
16473 \begin_layout Standard
16475 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
16476 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
16478 \begin_inset space ~
16482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16484 reference "subsec:Modules"
16491 ), or local layout settings (see section
16492 \begin_inset space ~
16496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16498 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
16503 As the two builtin styles, they provide
16507 markup for specific functions.
16508 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
16513 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
16523 \begin_inset Quotes els
16527 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16533 \begin_layout Standard
16535 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
16536 These styles can be found, if available, in the
16538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16540 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
16542 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
16548 \begin_layout Standard
16550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
16551 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
16556 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
16557 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
16558 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
16563 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
16564 \begin_inset Flex Emph
16567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16569 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
16577 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
16578 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
16579 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
16580 \begin_inset Flex Code
16583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
16594 \begin_inset Flex Strong
16597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16599 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
16608 \begin_inset Flex Noun
16611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16613 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
16622 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
16623 on screen their formal appearance.
16628 \begin_layout Subsection
16630 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
16632 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
16636 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
16642 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
16644 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
16650 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
16652 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
16656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16658 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16663 \begin_inset Index idx
16668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16677 \begin_layout Standard
16678 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
16679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
16682 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
16684 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
16686 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
16690 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
16691 the properties of text passages
16692 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
16696 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
16697 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
16698 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
16699 from ordinary dialog.
16700 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16706 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
16707 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
16708 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
16709 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
16710 the properties of the respective text passages.
16715 comes in as a last resort.
16720 \begin_layout Standard
16721 Before we document how to
16722 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
16723 use custom character style
16724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
16725 tweak the text properties
16727 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
16728 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
16730 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
16734 \begin_inset Newline newline
16737 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
16738 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
16741 \begin_layout Standard
16743 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
16744 use custom character styles
16745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
16746 tweak text properties
16749 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
16752 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16754 \begin_inset space ~
16757 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16765 arg "dialog-show character"
16768 dialog or press the toolbar button
16771 arg "dialog-show character"
16776 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
16779 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
16780 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
16782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
16785 property that you can choose.
16786 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
16789 \begin_inset space ~
16794 , which keeps the current state of that property.
16796 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
16800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
16802 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
16807 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
16808 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
16809 environments all at once.
16812 \begin_layout Standard
16814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
16816 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
16820 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
16822 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
16826 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
16828 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
16833 , and their options (in addition to
16836 \begin_inset space ~
16842 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
16846 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
16854 \begin_layout Labeling
16855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16869 The possible options are:
16873 \begin_layout Labeling
16874 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16879 This is the Roman font family.
16880 Normally a serif font.
16881 It's also the default family.
16891 \begin_layout Labeling
16892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16896 \begin_inset space ~
16903 This is the Sans Serif font family.
16915 \begin_layout Labeling
16916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16923 This is the Typewriter font family.
16929 arg "font-typewriter"
16935 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
16939 \begin_layout Standard
16941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
16942 The general differences of these families are:
16945 \begin_layout Itemize
16947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
16952 fonts use characters with serifs.
16953 These are the small
16954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16961 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16962 The following example shows the difference:
16963 \begin_inset Newline newline
16967 \begin_inset Newline newline
16972 text without serifs
16975 \begin_inset Newline newline
16978 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16979 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16986 \begin_layout Itemize
16988 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16993 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16994 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16995 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16998 \begin_layout Itemize
17000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17013 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17031 \begin_inset Newline newline
17035 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17053 \begin_inset Note Note
17056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17058 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17059 For more on phantoms see section
17060 \begin_inset space ~
17064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17066 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17076 \begin_inset Newline newline
17085 \begin_layout Labeling
17086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17091 This corresponds to the print weight.
17096 \begin_layout Labeling
17097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17102 This is the Medium font series.
17103 It's also the default series.
17106 \begin_layout Labeling
17107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17114 This is the Bold font series.
17127 \begin_layout Labeling
17128 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17133 As the name implies.
17138 \begin_layout Labeling
17139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17144 This is the Upright font shape.
17145 It's also the default shape.
17148 \begin_layout Labeling
17149 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17159 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
17164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
17169 s the Italic font shape
17175 \begin_layout Labeling
17176 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17183 This is the Slanted font shape
17185 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
17186 , this is different from italic).
17189 \begin_layout Labeling
17190 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17194 \begin_inset space ~
17201 This is the Small caps font shape
17208 \begin_layout Labeling
17209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17211 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17216 Alters the text color.
17217 Note that not all DVI
17218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
17220 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17221 viewers are able to display colors.
17225 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
17227 \begin_inset space ~
17231 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17234 , which means that the document default color set in
17236 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17237 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17243 \begin_inset space ~
17249 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
17251 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17253 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
17255 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17333 \begin_inset Index idx
17338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17340 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17355 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
17361 \begin_layout Labeling
17362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17364 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
17369 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
17370 the language of the document.
17371 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17372 workarea in blue to
17373 indicate the change
17374 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
17375 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
17377 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
17379 \begin_inset Newline newline
17382 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17384 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17385 When using the spell checking (see section
17386 \begin_inset space ~
17390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17392 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17396 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17397 \begin_inset Newline newline
17400 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17402 Exclude from Spellchecking
17405 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17406 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
17410 \begin_layout Labeling
17411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17416 Alters the size of the font.
17418 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
17420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
17424 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
17427 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
17428 document font size.
17429 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
17430 the details, but a general description of what
17436 \begin_layout Labeling
17437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17458 arg "font-size tiny"
17464 \begin_layout Labeling
17465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17486 arg "font-size scriptsize"
17492 \begin_layout Labeling
17493 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17514 arg "font-size footnotesize"
17520 \begin_layout Labeling
17521 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17542 arg "font-size small"
17548 \begin_layout Labeling
17549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17563 It's also the default size.
17567 arg "font-size normal"
17573 \begin_layout Labeling
17574 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17595 arg "font-size large"
17601 \begin_layout Labeling
17602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17623 arg "font-size larger"
17629 \begin_layout Labeling
17630 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17651 arg "font-size largest"
17657 \begin_layout Labeling
17658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17679 arg "font-size huge"
17685 \begin_layout Labeling
17686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17707 arg "font-size giant"
17713 \begin_layout Labeling
17714 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17719 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
17720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17739 arg "font-size increase"
17745 \begin_layout Labeling
17746 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17751 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
17752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17771 arg "font-size decrease"
17777 \begin_layout Standard
17782 : don't go crazy with this feature.
17783 You should almost never need to change the font size.
17785 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
17786 — use those instead.
17787 This is here for fine-tuning only!
17788 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
17793 \begin_layout Standard
17795 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
17796 Another combo box allows to tweak
17803 \begin_layout Labeling
17804 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17806 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
17811 Alters the text color.
17812 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
17817 , which means that the document default color set in
17819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17820 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17826 \begin_inset space ~
17831 is used, you can select
17908 \begin_inset Index idx
17913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17915 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
17919 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17924 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
17942 \begin_layout Labeling
17943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17945 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
17949 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
17955 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
17956 change a few other things at the character level
17957 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
17958 have text passages being underlined
17962 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
17963 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
17964 days, when you could not change fonts.
17965 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17966 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17967 because some people
17971 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17978 \begin_layout Labeling
17979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17981 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
17988 This is text with emphasize on
17991 This might seem like the same as
17995 , but it is actually a bit different.
18001 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
18003 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18004 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18008 \begin_layout Labeling
18009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18011 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18016 Don't use underlining.
18021 \begin_layout Labeling
18022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18028 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18036 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18038 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18047 arg "font-underline"
18053 \begin_inset Newline newline
18057 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18060 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18061 when you could not change fonts.
18062 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18063 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18064 because some people
18068 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18073 \begin_layout Labeling
18074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18078 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18080 \begin_inset space ~
18089 This is text with Double under
18090 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
18092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
18101 arg "font-underunderline"
18105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
18107 \begin_inset Newline newline
18110 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
18111 about double underbar
18116 \begin_layout Labeling
18117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18121 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
18123 \begin_inset space ~
18132 This is text with Wavy under
18133 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
18135 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
18144 arg "font-underwave"
18148 \begin_inset Newline newline
18151 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
18152 Keep antinausea pills handy.
18153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
18158 \begin_layout Labeling
18159 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18161 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
18166 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
18172 \begin_layout Labeling
18173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18175 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
18180 Don't use strikethrough.
18183 \begin_layout Labeling
18184 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18188 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18194 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
18202 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
18204 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
18205 Single strikethrough
18213 arg "font-strikeout"
18217 \begin_inset Newline newline
18220 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
18221 changed in the meantime.
18224 \begin_layout Labeling
18225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18227 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
18231 \begin_inset space ~
18235 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
18237 \begin_inset space ~
18241 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
18249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
18251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
18257 \begin_inset Newline newline
18260 This is used to make text hardly readable.
18264 \begin_layout Standard
18266 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
18267 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
18270 \begin_layout Labeling
18271 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18273 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
18278 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
18279 the language of the document.
18280 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18281 workarea in blue to
18282 indicate the change.
18283 \begin_inset Newline newline
18286 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18288 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18289 When using the spell checking (see section
18290 \begin_inset space ~
18294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18296 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18300 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18301 \begin_inset Newline newline
18304 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
18306 Exclude from Spellchecking
18309 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18312 \begin_layout Standard
18314 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
18315 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
18316 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
18317 \begin_inset space ~
18321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18323 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
18328 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
18332 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
18338 \begin_layout Itemize
18340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
18347 This is text with emphasize on
18352 \begin_layout Itemize
18356 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
18363 This is text with Noun on.
18365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
18372 , this is a logical attribute.
18373 Normally it's equivalent to
18376 \begin_inset space ~
18386 \begin_layout Standard
18387 So you have a huge number of combinations to
18388 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
18390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
18395 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
18396 chosen a new character style
18397 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
18398 applied a text property
18401 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
18404 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
18406 \begin_inset space ~
18409 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
18417 arg "dialog-show character"
18423 arg "dialog-show character"
18426 ) dialog, the settings are
18427 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
18431 You can activate the
18432 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
18434 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
18435 last applied properties
18437 by using the toolbar button
18440 arg "textstyle-apply"
18444 The button lets you apply
18445 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
18446 your custom character style
18447 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
18450 even when the dialog isn't visible.
18452 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
18453 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
18454 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
18455 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
18460 \begin_layout Standard
18461 To completely reset the
18462 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
18464 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
18465 text properties of a selection
18467 to the default, use
18468 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
18470 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
18480 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
18485 from the menu of the toolbar button
18488 arg "textstyle-apply"
18495 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
18496 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
18497 you just set the shape to
18498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18530 \begin_layout Standard
18532 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
18533 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
18541 \begin_inset space ~
18553 \begin_layout Itemize
18555 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
18561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18568 font, which means every character has the same width; the
18569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18586 \begin_inset Newline newline
18590 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18604 \begin_inset Note Note
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 For more on phantoms see section
18609 \begin_inset space ~
18613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18615 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
18625 \begin_inset Newline newline
18631 \begin_layout Itemize
18633 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
18638 fonts use characters with serifs.
18639 These are the small
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18647 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
18648 The following example shows the difference:
18649 \begin_inset Newline newline
18653 \begin_inset Newline newline
18658 text without serifs
18661 \begin_inset Newline newline
18664 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
18665 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
18672 \begin_layout Itemize
18674 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
18679 is not recommended for use as a base type.
18680 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
18681 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18688 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
18689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18696 refers to applying or removing font properties.
18697 When a property is marked for toggling in the
18700 \begin_inset space ~
18705 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
18706 the property to be removed.
18707 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
18708 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
18709 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
18712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18727 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
18728 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
18729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18736 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
18740 \begin_inset space ~
18745 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
18748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18756 If you, for example, set
18757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18775 \begin_inset space ~
18780 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
18782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18789 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
18794 \begin_layout Standard
18796 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
18799 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
18800 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
18803 \begin_layout Section
18804 Printing and Previewing
18807 \begin_layout Subsection
18811 \begin_layout Standard
18812 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
18813 using \SpecialChar LyX
18814 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
18815 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
18816 goes on behind-the-scenes.
18817 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
18819 Additional Features
18824 \begin_layout Standard
18826 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
18829 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
18830 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
18831 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18834 is what you use to do your actual writing.
18835 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
18836 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18837 to turn your writing into printable output.
18838 This happens in two stages:
18841 \begin_layout Enumerate
18842 First, \SpecialChar LyX
18843 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
18845 a file with the extension,
18846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18860 \begin_layout Enumerate
18861 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
18862 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18863 to use the commands in the
18867 file to produce printable output.
18870 \begin_layout Subsection
18871 Output file formats
18872 \begin_inset Index idx
18877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18886 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18895 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
18897 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
18901 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
18905 \begin_inset Index idx
18910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18912 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18917 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
18919 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
18935 \begin_layout Standard
18936 This file type has the extension
18937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18949 It contains your document as plain text
18950 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
18952 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
18953 following the rules of the
18954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18957 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
18958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18966 \begin_layout Standard
18967 You can export your document to
18968 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
18970 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
18975 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18976 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18978 \begin_inset space ~
18984 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
18985 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
18986 bibliography (section
18987 \begin_inset space ~
18991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18993 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
18998 If your document includes such material, use
19000 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19001 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19003 \begin_inset space ~
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19011 \begin_inset space ~
19019 \begin_inset space ~
19023 \begin_inset space ~
19029 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
19030 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19031 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19033 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19042 \begin_inset Index idx
19047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19067 \begin_layout Standard
19068 This file type has the extension
19069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19080 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19083 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
19084 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
19085 -Errors or to process it manually
19086 with console commands.
19087 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
19088 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
19089 's temporary directory whenever you
19090 view or export your document.
19093 \begin_layout Standard
19094 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19095 -file using the menu
19097 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19098 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19102 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
19103 export variants are explained in section
19104 \begin_inset space ~
19108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19110 reference "subsec:Export"
19117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19119 \begin_inset Index idx
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19126 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19143 \begin_layout Standard
19144 This file type has the extension
19145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19165 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
19166 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
19167 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
19171 \begin_layout Standard
19172 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
19173 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
19174 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
19175 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
19176 when you view the DVI.
19177 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
19180 \begin_layout Standard
19181 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
19183 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19184 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19189 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19190 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19192 \begin_inset space ~
19198 The latter option uses the program
19200 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19206 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19209 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
19210 font access (see section
19211 \begin_inset space ~
19215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19217 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
19222 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19223 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
19228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19230 \begin_inset Index idx
19235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19237 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19254 \begin_layout Standard
19255 This file type has the extension
19256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19268 PostScript was developed by the company
19272 as a printer language.
19273 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
19275 PostScript can be seen as a
19276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19279 programming language
19280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19283 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
19287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19295 \begin_inset Index idx
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19303 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19322 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
19325 \begin_layout Standard
19326 PostScript can only contain images in the format
19327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19330 Encapsulated PostScript
19331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19334 (EPS, file extension
19335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19347 As \SpecialChar LyX
19348 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
19349 convert them in the background to EPS.
19350 If, for example, you have 50
19351 \begin_inset space ~
19354 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
19356 \begin_inset space ~
19359 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
19360 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
19362 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
19363 EPS to avoid this problem.
19366 \begin_layout Standard
19367 You can export to PostScript using the menu
19369 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19370 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19378 \begin_inset Index idx
19383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19385 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19400 \begin_inset Index idx
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19414 \begin_layout Standard
19415 This file type has the extension
19416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19432 Portable Document Format
19433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19440 was derived from PostScript.
19441 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
19443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19450 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
19451 looks exactly the same.
19454 \begin_layout Standard
19455 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
19456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19459 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19463 (JPG, file extension
19464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19491 Portable Network Graphics
19492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19495 (PNG, file extension
19496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19508 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
19509 converts them in the
19510 background to one of these formats.
19511 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
19512 will slow down your workflow.
19513 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
19516 \begin_layout Standard
19517 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
19519 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19525 \begin_layout Description
19527 \begin_inset space ~
19530 (pdflatex) This uses the program
19534 which converts your file directly to PDF.
19537 \begin_layout Description
19539 \begin_inset space ~
19546 ) This uses the program
19548 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19551 which converts your file directly to PDF.
19554 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19557 is a new engine, derived from
19561 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
19562 access (see section
19563 \begin_inset space ~
19567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19569 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
19574 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19575 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
19580 \begin_layout Description
19582 \begin_inset space ~
19589 ) This uses the program
19594 that converts your file directly to PDF.
19600 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
19601 font access (see section
19602 \begin_inset space ~
19606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19608 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
19613 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
19614 vertically written Japanese.
19617 \begin_layout Description
19619 \begin_inset space ~
19622 (cropped) This is the same as
19625 \begin_inset space ~
19630 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
19631 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
19632 to generate good-looking
19633 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
19636 \begin_layout Description
19638 \begin_inset space ~
19641 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
19645 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
19649 \begin_layout Description
19651 \begin_inset space ~
19654 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
19658 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
19659 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
19663 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
19664 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
19667 \begin_layout Standard
19671 \begin_inset space ~
19680 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
19681 works without problems.
19682 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
19683 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
19687 \begin_inset space ~
19695 \begin_inset space ~
19700 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
19708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19710 \begin_inset Index idx
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19732 \begin_inset Index idx
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 \begin_layout Standard
19747 This file type has the extension
19748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19760 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
19761 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
19762 When \SpecialChar LyX
19763 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
19764 suitable for the purpose.
19765 For the math output you can choose in the menu
19767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19768 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19771 between different formats, which are described in section
19773 Math Output in XHTML
19778 \begin_inset space ~
19786 \begin_layout Standard
19787 XHTML output remains
19788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19795 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
19796 features are supported yet.
19800 and the World Wide Web
19804 Additional Features
19806 manual, for more information.
19809 \begin_layout Standard
19810 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
19812 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19813 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19819 \begin_layout Subsection
19821 \begin_inset Index idx
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19845 \begin_layout Standard
19846 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
19847 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
19856 or use the toolbar button
19863 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
19864 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
19865 \begin_inset space ~
19869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19871 reference "sec:File-Formats"
19875 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
19877 \begin_inset space ~
19881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19883 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
19888 Further output formats can be selected via
19890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19891 View (Other Formats)
19893 or the toolbar button
19902 \begin_layout Standard
19903 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
19904 viewer window using the menu
19906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19912 Update (Other Formats)
19917 \begin_layout Standard
19918 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
19921 To have a real output, export your document.
19924 \begin_layout Section
19925 A few Words about Typography
19926 \begin_inset Index idx
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19940 \begin_layout Subsection
19941 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
19942 \begin_inset Index idx
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 \begin_inset Index idx
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 \begin_layout Standard
19969 In \SpecialChar LyX
19971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19982 symbol comes in four variants: the
19999 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20005 \begin_layout Standard
20006 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20016 height_special "totalheight"
20021 backgroundcolor "none"
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20025 \begin_inset Tabular
20026 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
20027 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20028 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20030 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20031 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20032 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20061 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20100 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 system key combination
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
20131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20140 and the em dash with
20143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20156 is the Mac label for the right
20166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20179 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 system key combination or
20203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 \begin_inset Formula $-$
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20269 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20275 \begin_layout Standard
20276 Dashes can also be inserted with
20278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20280 \begin_inset space ~
20283 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
20291 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
20292 and 2014 for the en dash).
20295 \begin_layout Standard
20296 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
20297 mode and has a length of its own.
20298 Here are some examples:
20301 \begin_layout Enumerate
20302 line- and page-breaks
20303 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20313 \begin_layout Enumerate
20315 \begin_inset space ~
20319 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20329 \begin_layout Enumerate
20330 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
20331 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20341 \begin_layout Enumerate
20342 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
20346 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20356 \begin_layout Standard
20358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
20360 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
20361 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
20369 \begin_layout Subsection
20370 Dashes and Line Breaks
20371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20373 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
20380 \begin_layout Standard
20381 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
20382 case and locale, e.
20383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20389 \begin_layout Itemize
20390 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
20391 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
20394 \begin_layout Itemize
20395 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
20399 \begin_layout Itemize
20400 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
20401 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
20404 \begin_layout Standard
20405 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
20406 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20417 allows line breaks after hyphens
20418 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
20420 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
20423 en-dashes and em-dashes.
20426 \begin_layout Enumerate
20427 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
20428 \begin_inset space ~
20431 – common in British English and generally recommended by
20433 The Elements of Typographic Style
20436 \begin_inset space ~
20439 – can be prevented using
20440 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
20442 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
20448 \begin_layout Enumerate
20449 Unwanted line breaks
20454 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
20456 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
20459 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 Prevent Hyphenation
20471 \begin_inset space ~
20487 in \SpecialChar TeX
20489 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
20491 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
20493 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
20495 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
20496 space does not suffice
20500 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20507 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
20508 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
20509 in the document language.
20510 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
20524 \begin_layout Itemize
20526 \begin_inset space ~
20530 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20540 height_special "totalheight"
20545 backgroundcolor "none"
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 \begin_layout Itemize
20559 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20569 height_special "totalheight"
20574 backgroundcolor "none"
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 \begin_inset space ~
20587 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
20588 \begin_inset space ~
20591 – sont très utiles.
20594 \begin_layout Itemize
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
20612 \begin_layout Standard
20613 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
20614 \begin_inset space ~
20617 – in contrast to an overfull line
20618 \begin_inset space ~
20621 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20625 \begin_layout Standard
20626 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
20629 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20630 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20631 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
20632 Disallow line breaks after dashes
20637 \begin_layout Enumerate
20638 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
20639 They can be prevented using
20640 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
20642 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
20645 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
20651 \begin_layout Itemize
20653 \begin_inset space ~
20656 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
20657 \begin_inset space ~
20660 – sont très utiles.
20664 \begin_layout Enumerate
20665 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
20666 \begin_inset Newline newline
20671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20672 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20674 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
20676 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
20678 \begin_inset space ~
20684 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
20686 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
20688 \begin_inset space ~
20699 \begin_layout Itemize
20700 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
20701 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
20702 should be followed by
20703 a line break opportunity.
20706 \begin_layout Standard
20707 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
20708 \begin_inset space ~
20712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20714 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
20725 \begin_layout Enumerate
20726 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
20727 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
20728 or en dashes (see section
20729 \begin_inset space ~
20733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20735 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
20745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20746 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
20749 \begin_layout Standard
20750 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
20752 \begin_inset space ~
20755 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
20756 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
20758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20765 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
20766 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
20774 \begin_layout Standard
20775 Since \SpecialChar LyX
20777 \begin_inset space ~
20780 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20782 prevents ligation to dashes.
20784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20791 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
20796 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
20797 after the input (unless the current text font is
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 The behavior was changed since
20807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20822 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
20823 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
20824 as non-breakable dashes.
20825 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
20833 \begin_layout Standard
20836 \begin_inset space ~
20844 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
20846 \begin_inset space ~
20849 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
20852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20853 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20854 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
20855 Disallow line breaks after dashes
20857 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
20861 If you used both literal and
20862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20869 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
20871 \begin_inset space ~
20874 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
20875 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
20878 \begin_layout Subsection
20880 \begin_inset Index idx
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20894 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
20901 \begin_layout Standard
20902 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
20903 but automatically in the output.
20904 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20910 \begin_inset Index idx
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 following the rules of the document language.
20934 does not hyphenate text in the
20938 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
20941 \begin_layout Standard
20943 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
20947 font and with unusual constructs, like
20948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20956 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
20957 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
20958 This is done with the menu
20960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20961 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20963 \begin_inset space ~
20969 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20971 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
20975 \begin_layout Standard
20976 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
20977 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
20979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20988 would then see the hyphen
20989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20996 as a line break possibility.
20997 A line break at this point would look ugly.
20998 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a
20999 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
21001 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
21006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21007 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21009 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
21011 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
21016 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
21018 Prevent Hyphenation
21023 \begin_inset space ~
21031 \begin_layout Subsection
21033 \begin_inset Index idx
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21048 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
21049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21051 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
21058 \begin_layout Standard
21059 When \SpecialChar LyX
21060 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
21061 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
21063 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
21066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21069 appropriate amount of space.
21070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21073 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
21075 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
21076 gets after another word.
21079 \begin_layout Standard
21080 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
21081 not work in all cases.
21083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21094 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
21095 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
21098 \begin_layout Standard
21099 Here are some examples of
21103 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
21106 \begin_layout Itemize
21111 \begin_layout Itemize
21116 \begin_layout Standard
21117 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
21120 \begin_layout Itemize
21122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21126 this is too much space!
21129 \begin_layout Itemize
21134 \begin_layout Standard
21135 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
21138 \begin_layout Standard
21139 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
21142 \begin_layout Enumerate
21146 \begin_inset space ~
21151 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
21152 \begin_inset space ~
21156 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
21158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21160 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
21165 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
21167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21169 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
21176 \begin_inset Index idx
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 \begin_layout Enumerate
21204 \begin_inset space ~
21209 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
21210 \begin_inset space ~
21214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21216 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
21221 \begin_inset Index idx
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 \begin_layout Enumerate
21249 \begin_inset space ~
21253 \begin_inset space ~
21257 \begin_inset space ~
21264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21266 \begin_inset space ~
21271 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
21272 This function is also bound to
21275 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
21281 \begin_layout Standard
21282 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
21285 \begin_layout Itemize
21287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21291 \begin_inset space \space{}
21294 this is too much space!
21297 \begin_layout Itemize
21298 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
21302 \begin_layout Standard
21303 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
21304 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
21306 will take care of this.
21309 \begin_layout Standard
21310 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
21314 \begin_inset space ~
21320 feature described in the section
21322 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
21327 Additional Features
21332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21334 \begin_inset Index idx
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 \begin_inset Index idx
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 \begin_layout Standard
21382 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
21383 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
21384 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
21386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21394 The keyboard character,
21398 , generates this automatically.
21401 \begin_layout Standard
21402 You can specify what character the
21406 key produces by using the submenu
21412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21416 \begin_inset Index idx
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 dialog and switching the
21441 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
21442 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
21444 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
21446 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
21450 \begin_inset space ~
21456 \begin_layout Labeling
21457 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21469 \begin_inset space ~
21473 \begin_inset space ~
21477 \begin_inset Quotes els
21481 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21495 \begin_inset Quotes els
21499 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21502 quotation marks (as common, e.
21503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21509 \begin_layout Labeling
21510 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21513 \begin_inset Quotes sld
21517 \begin_inset Quotes sld
21521 \begin_inset space ~
21525 \begin_inset space ~
21529 \begin_inset Quotes sls
21533 \begin_inset Quotes srs
21539 \begin_inset Quotes sld
21543 \begin_inset Quotes sld
21547 \begin_inset Quotes sls
21551 \begin_inset Quotes srs
21554 quotation marks (as common, e.
21555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21561 \begin_layout Labeling
21562 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21565 \begin_inset Quotes gld
21569 \begin_inset Quotes grd
21573 \begin_inset space ~
21577 \begin_inset space ~
21581 \begin_inset Quotes gls
21585 \begin_inset Quotes grs
21591 \begin_inset Quotes gld
21595 \begin_inset Quotes grd
21599 \begin_inset Quotes gls
21603 \begin_inset Quotes grs
21606 quotation marks (as common, e.
21607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21613 \begin_layout Labeling
21614 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21617 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21621 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21625 \begin_inset space ~
21629 \begin_inset space ~
21633 \begin_inset Quotes pls
21637 \begin_inset Quotes prs
21643 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21647 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21651 \begin_inset Quotes pls
21655 \begin_inset Quotes prs
21658 quotation marks (as common, e.
21659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21665 \begin_layout Labeling
21666 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21669 \begin_inset Quotes cld
21673 \begin_inset Quotes crd
21677 \begin_inset space ~
21681 \begin_inset space ~
21685 \begin_inset Quotes cls
21689 \begin_inset Quotes crs
21695 \begin_inset Quotes cld
21699 \begin_inset Quotes crd
21703 \begin_inset Quotes cls
21707 \begin_inset Quotes crs
21710 quotation marks (as common, e.
21711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21714 g., in Switzerland)
21717 \begin_layout Labeling
21718 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21721 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21725 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21729 \begin_inset space ~
21733 \begin_inset space ~
21737 \begin_inset Quotes als
21741 \begin_inset Quotes ars
21747 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21751 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21755 \begin_inset Quotes als
21759 \begin_inset Quotes ars
21762 quotation marks (as common, e.
21763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21769 \begin_layout Labeling
21770 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21773 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
21777 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
21781 \begin_inset space ~
21785 \begin_inset space ~
21789 \begin_inset Quotes qls
21793 \begin_inset Quotes qls
21799 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
21803 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
21807 \begin_inset Quotes qls
21811 \begin_inset Quotes qls
21814 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
21817 \begin_layout Labeling
21818 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21821 \begin_inset Quotes bld
21825 \begin_inset Quotes brd
21829 \begin_inset space ~
21833 \begin_inset space ~
21837 \begin_inset Quotes bls
21841 \begin_inset Quotes brs
21847 \begin_inset Quotes bld
21851 \begin_inset Quotes brd
21855 \begin_inset Quotes bls
21859 \begin_inset Quotes brs
21862 quotation marks (as common, e.
21863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21866 g., in Great Britain)
21869 \begin_layout Labeling
21870 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21873 \begin_inset Quotes fld
21877 \begin_inset Quotes frd
21881 \begin_inset space ~
21885 \begin_inset space ~
21889 \begin_inset Quotes fls
21893 \begin_inset Quotes frs
21899 \begin_inset Quotes fld
21903 \begin_inset Quotes frd
21907 \begin_inset Quotes fls
21911 \begin_inset Quotes frs
21914 quotation marks (as common, e.
21915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21921 \begin_layout Labeling
21922 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21925 \begin_inset Quotes ild
21929 \begin_inset Quotes ird
21933 \begin_inset space ~
21937 \begin_inset space ~
21941 \begin_inset Quotes ils
21945 \begin_inset Quotes irs
21951 \begin_inset Quotes ild
21955 \begin_inset Quotes ird
21959 \begin_inset Quotes ils
21963 \begin_inset Quotes irs
21966 quotation marks (another style common in France)
21970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
21972 since these look identical to the inner marks.
21973 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
21974 the inner marks differ).
21982 \begin_layout Labeling
21983 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21986 \begin_inset Quotes rld
21990 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
21994 \begin_inset space ~
21998 \begin_inset space ~
22002 \begin_inset Quotes rls
22006 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
22012 \begin_inset Quotes rld
22016 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
22020 \begin_inset Quotes rls
22024 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
22027 quotation marks (as common, e.
22028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22034 \begin_layout Labeling
22035 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22038 \begin_inset Quotes wld
22042 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
22046 \begin_inset space ~
22050 \begin_inset space ~
22054 \begin_inset Quotes wls
22058 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
22064 \begin_inset Quotes wld
22068 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
22072 \begin_inset Quotes wls
22076 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
22079 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
22080 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
22084 \begin_layout Labeling
22085 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22087 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
22090 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22094 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22098 \begin_inset space ~
22102 \begin_inset space ~
22106 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22110 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22118 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22126 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22134 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22142 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22147 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
22152 \begin_layout Labeling
22153 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22154 \begin_inset Quotes jld
22162 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
22168 \begin_inset space ~
22172 \begin_inset space ~
22178 \begin_inset Quotes jls
22186 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
22190 \begin_inset Quotes jld
22194 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
22198 \begin_inset Quotes jls
22202 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
22205 quotation marks (as common, e.
22206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22215 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
22216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22218 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
22224 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
22225 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
22233 \begin_layout Labeling
22234 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22235 \begin_inset Quotes kld
22243 \begin_inset Quotes krd
22249 \begin_inset space ~
22253 \begin_inset space ~
22259 \begin_inset Quotes kls
22267 \begin_inset Quotes krs
22271 \begin_inset Quotes kld
22275 \begin_inset Quotes krd
22279 \begin_inset Quotes kls
22283 \begin_inset Quotes krs
22286 quotation marks (as common, e.
22287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22290 g., in North Korea and China)
22291 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
22293 \begin_inset script superscript
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
22298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22300 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
22315 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22321 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
22322 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
22332 \begin_layout Standard
22333 Inner quotation marks
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
22339 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
22340 case (and specifically the British style shows that
22341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22348 does not necessarily mean
22349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22357 This is why we call them
22358 \begin_inset Quotes els
22362 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22378 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
22380 \begin_inset Quotes els
22384 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22387 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
22390 arg "quote-insert inner"
22395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22401 \begin_layout Standard
22402 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
22403 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
22404 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
22405 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
22406 If you check the setting
22408 Use dynamic quotation marks
22412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22413 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22416 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
22417 they appear in a special color).
22418 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
22419 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
22421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22424 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
22427 \begin_layout Standard
22428 Individual quotation marks (i.
22429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22432 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
22433 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
22437 \begin_layout Subsection
22439 \begin_inset Index idx
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 \begin_inset Index idx
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22485 name "subsec:Ligatures"
22492 \begin_layout Standard
22493 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
22494 print them as single characters.
22495 These groups are known as
22500 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
22501 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
22503 Here are the standard ligatures:
22506 \begin_layout Itemize
22510 \begin_layout Itemize
22514 \begin_layout Itemize
22518 \begin_layout Itemize
22522 \begin_layout Itemize
22526 \begin_layout Standard
22527 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
22530 \begin_layout Standard
22531 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
22532 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
22533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22540 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
22541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22556 To break a ligature, use
22558 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22559 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22561 \begin_inset space ~
22568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22579 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
22581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22596 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
22598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22604 \begin_layout Subsection
22606 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
22608 \begin_inset Index idx
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 \begin_layout Standard
22636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22637 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
22641 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
22644 \begin_layout Description
22646 The name of the game.
22649 \begin_layout Description
22651 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
22655 \begin_layout Description
22657 The \SpecialChar TeX
22658 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
22662 \begin_layout Description
22663 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
22664 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
22668 \begin_layout Standard
22669 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22675 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
22679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22683 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
22684 world to give programs geek version numbers.
22685 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
22686 converges to the number
22687 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
22690 : The actual version is
22691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22699 , the previous one was
22700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22711 \begin_layout Subsection
22713 \begin_inset Index idx
22718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 \begin_layout Standard
22738 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
22739 space between two words.
22740 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
22743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22750 for units use the menu
22752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22753 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22755 \begin_inset space ~
22763 arg "space-insert thin"
22769 \begin_layout Standard
22770 Here is an example to show the differences:
22773 \begin_layout Standard
22774 \begin_inset Tabular
22775 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
22776 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22777 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
22778 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
22780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 \begin_inset space ~
22789 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
22797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 space between number and unit
22808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22817 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
22825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 half space between number and unit
22842 \begin_layout Subsection
22844 \begin_inset Index idx
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22868 \begin_layout Standard
22869 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
22871 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
22872 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
22873 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
22874 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
22875 These bits of text became known as
22886 \begin_layout Standard
22887 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
22888 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
22889 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
22890 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
22891 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
22892 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
22893 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
22894 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
22895 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
22896 \begin_inset Newline newline
22904 \begin_inset Newline newline
22912 \begin_inset Newline newline
22915 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22916 preamble of your document to avoid them.
22917 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
22919 \begin_inset space ~
22923 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
22925 key "latexcompanion"
22931 \begin_inset space ~
22935 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
22942 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
22943 's page break mechanism.
22946 \begin_layout Chapter
22947 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
22948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22950 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
22957 \begin_layout Standard
22958 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22961 \begin_inset space ~
22967 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22970 \begin_layout Section
22972 \begin_inset Index idx
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22993 \begin_layout Standard
22995 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
22998 \begin_layout Description
23001 \begin_inset space ~
23004 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
23005 \begin_inset Newline newline
23009 \begin_inset Note Note
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
23021 \begin_layout Description
23022 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
23023 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
23024 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
23027 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
23028 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
23030 \begin_inset space ~
23036 \begin_inset Newline newline
23040 \begin_inset Note Comment
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
23053 \begin_layout Description
23055 \begin_inset space ~
23058 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
23059 set in the document settings under
23061 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
23063 \begin_inset space ~
23069 \begin_inset Newline newline
23073 \begin_inset Newline newline
23077 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
23087 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
23092 of a comment that appears in the output.
23098 \begin_inset Newline newline
23102 \begin_inset Newline newline
23105 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
23108 \begin_layout Standard
23109 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
23117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23121 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
23124 \begin_layout Section
23126 \begin_inset Index idx
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23140 name "sec:Footnotes"
23147 \begin_layout Standard
23149 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
23152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23155 or the toolbar button
23158 arg "footnote-insert"
23170 \begin_inset Graphics
23171 filename clipart/footnote.png
23180 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
23181 's representation of your footnote.
23191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23210 label, the box will
23214 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
23215 Clicking on the box label again will close
23228 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
23229 and click on the footnote
23244 \begin_layout Standard
23245 Here is an example footnote:
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
23262 \begin_layout Standard
23263 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
23264 position where the footnote box is placed.
23265 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
23266 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
23267 according to the document class.
23269 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
23270 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23276 ey are described in the
23279 \begin_inset space ~
23287 \begin_layout Section
23289 \begin_inset Index idx
23294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23303 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
23310 \begin_layout Standard
23311 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
23313 When you insert a margin note via the menu
23315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23317 \begin_inset space ~
23322 or the toolbar button
23325 arg "marginalnote-insert"
23344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23351 appearing within your text.
23352 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
23353 's representation of your margin
23362 \begin_layout Standard
23363 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
23367 \begin_inset Marginal
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23372 This is a marginal note.
23380 \begin_layout Standard
23381 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
23382 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
23383 pages, right on odd pages.
23386 \begin_layout Standard
23387 For further information about marginal notes see the section
23390 \begin_inset space ~
23398 \begin_inset space ~
23406 \begin_layout Section
23407 Graphics and Images
23408 \begin_inset Index idx
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 \begin_inset Index idx
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23434 name "sec:Graphics"
23441 \begin_layout Standard
23442 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
23443 you want and click on the toolbar icon
23446 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23455 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
23458 \begin_layout Standard
23459 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
23464 tab allows you to choose your image file.
23465 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
23467 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
23468 \begin_inset space ~
23472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23474 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
23481 \begin_layout Standard
23486 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
23487 of the image in the output.
23488 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
23492 \begin_inset space ~
23496 \begin_inset space ~
23505 \begin_inset space ~
23509 \begin_inset space ~
23513 \begin_inset space ~
23518 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
23519 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
23527 \begin_layout Standard
23531 \begin_inset space ~
23535 \begin_inset space ~
23540 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
23541 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
23543 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
23548 \begin_inset space ~
23553 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
23554 with the image size is printed.
23557 \begin_layout Standard
23558 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
23559 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
23561 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
23564 \begin_layout Standard
23566 \begin_inset Graphics
23567 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
23575 \begin_layout Standard
23576 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
23577 the image into a float, see section
23578 \begin_inset space ~
23582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23584 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23591 \begin_layout Subsection
23593 \begin_inset Index idx
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23600 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23617 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
23624 \begin_layout Standard
23625 You can insert images in any known file format.
23626 But as we explained in section
23627 \begin_inset space ~
23631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23633 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
23637 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
23639 therefore uses the program
23643 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
23644 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
23645 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
23646 \begin_inset space ~
23650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23652 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
23659 \begin_layout Standard
23660 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
23663 \begin_layout Description
23665 \begin_inset space ~
23668 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
23669 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
23670 Well-known bitmap image formats are
23671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23674 Graphics Interchange Format
23675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23678 (GIF, file extension
23679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23691 \begin_inset Index idx
23696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23698 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23716 Portable Network Graphics
23717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23720 (PNG, file extension
23721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23733 \begin_inset Index idx
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23758 Joint Photographic Experts Group
23759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23762 (JPG, file extension
23763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23787 \begin_inset Index idx
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23811 \begin_layout Description
23813 \begin_inset space ~
23816 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
23818 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
23819 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
23820 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
23821 \begin_inset Newline newline
23824 Scalable image formats can be
23825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23828 Scalable Vector Graphics
23829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23832 (SVG, file extension
23833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23845 \begin_inset Index idx
23850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23870 Encapsulated PostScript
23871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23874 (EPS, file extension
23875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23887 \begin_inset Index idx
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23912 Portable Document Format
23913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23916 (PDF, file extension
23917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23929 \begin_inset Index idx
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23949 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
23950 result will not be scalable.
23951 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
23956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
23965 \begin_layout Standard
23966 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
23973 \begin_layout Subsection
23974 Grouping of Image Settings
23975 \begin_inset Index idx
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23982 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 \begin_layout Standard
24000 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
24002 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
24003 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
24005 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
24006 need to manually change each of them.
24009 \begin_layout Standard
24010 A new group can be set by pressing the button
24013 \begin_inset space ~
24017 \begin_inset space ~
24029 \begin_inset space ~
24033 \begin_inset space ~
24039 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
24040 and checking the name of the desired group.
24043 \begin_layout Section
24045 \begin_inset Index idx
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24066 \begin_layout Standard
24067 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
24070 arg "tabular-insert"
24075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24079 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
24080 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
24081 , and you can select a specific (border) style
24084 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
24085 from the rest of the table.
24086 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
24087 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
24089 Here is an example table:
24092 \begin_layout Standard
24094 \begin_inset Tabular
24095 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
24096 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24097 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24098 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24099 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
24100 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24294 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
24298 \begin_layout Standard
24300 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
24301 This corresponds to the
24302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24309 table style listed in the style selection.
24312 \begin_layout Standard
24314 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
24315 Other available styles include:
24318 \begin_layout Itemize
24320 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
24322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24329 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
24333 \begin_layout Itemize
24335 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
24336 a border-less table with no lines at all,
24339 \begin_layout Itemize
24341 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
24343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24350 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
24351 bold top/bottom lines (see
24361 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
24362 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last
24368 \begin_layout Standard
24370 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
24371 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
24372 button can be changed in
24374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
24379 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
24383 \begin_layout Subsection
24387 \begin_layout Standard
24388 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
24391 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
24395 This brings up the table dialog.
24396 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
24397 cursor is placed currently.
24398 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
24399 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
24400 done on all of your selection.
24403 \begin_layout Standard
24404 In addition to the table dialog, the
24407 \begin_inset space ~
24412 helps you in setting table properties.
24413 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
24416 \begin_layout Standard
24420 \begin_inset space ~
24425 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
24426 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
24427 current cell respectively.
24428 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
24430 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
24431 of text, see section
24432 \begin_inset space ~
24436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24438 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
24445 \begin_layout Standard
24446 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
24447 using the check box
24456 This will merge the cells to
24460 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
24461 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
24462 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
24463 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
24464 in the last row without the upper border:
24467 \begin_layout Standard
24469 \begin_inset Tabular
24470 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
24471 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
24472 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24473 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
24474 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
24475 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24486 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24495 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24571 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 \begin_layout Standard
24607 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24608 -arguments for the table.
24609 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
24610 explained in the chapter
24617 \begin_inset space ~
24623 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
24624 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
24625 but are visible in the output.
24628 \begin_layout Standard
24629 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24637 Most DVI-viewers are
24641 able to display rotations.
24649 \begin_layout Standard
24654 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
24659 adds lines for all cell borders.
24662 \begin_layout Subsection
24664 \begin_inset Index idx
24669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24671 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24686 \begin_inset Index idx
24691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 \begin_layout Standard
24701 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
24704 \begin_inset space ~
24708 \begin_inset space ~
24716 \begin_inset space ~
24721 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
24722 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
24725 \begin_layout Description
24730 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
24731 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
24732 Except for the first page, if
24735 \begin_inset space ~
24743 \begin_layout Description
24747 \begin_inset space ~
24752 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
24753 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
24756 \begin_layout Description
24761 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
24762 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
24763 except for the last page, if
24766 \begin_inset space ~
24774 \begin_layout Description
24778 \begin_inset space ~
24783 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
24784 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
24787 \begin_layout Description
24788 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
24789 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
24791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24795 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
24798 \begin_inset space ~
24806 \begin_layout Standard
24807 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
24808 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
24809 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
24815 In this context, first means first in this order:
24818 \begin_inset space ~
24830 \begin_inset space ~
24835 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
24838 \begin_layout Standard
24840 \begin_inset Tabular
24841 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
24842 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
24843 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
24844 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24845 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24846 <row endfirsthead="true">
24847 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24853 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
24858 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24867 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24877 <row endfirsthead="true">
24878 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24889 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24910 <row endhead="true">
24911 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24922 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24931 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 <row endhead="true">
24942 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24953 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24962 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24974 <row endfoot="true">
24975 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24986 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24995 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25967 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25976 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25985 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25996 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26027 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26058 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26089 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26151 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26244 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26275 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26337 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26368 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26430 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26461 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26492 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26523 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26616 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26709 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26771 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26833 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26864 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26895 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26926 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26956 <row endlastfoot="true">
26957 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26968 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
26971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26977 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26994 \begin_layout Subsection
26996 \begin_inset Index idx
27001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27003 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27020 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
27027 \begin_layout Standard
27028 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
27029 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
27030 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
27031 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
27035 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
27038 \begin_layout Standard
27039 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
27040 for the column in the table dialog.
27041 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
27042 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
27046 \begin_layout Standard
27048 \begin_inset Tabular
27049 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
27050 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27052 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
27053 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27073 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27142 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
27147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27198 This is longer now.
27203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27254 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
27255 This is longer now.
27260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27286 \begin_layout Standard
27287 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
27288 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
27292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27293 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
27294 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
27299 Selection with the mouse or with
27303 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
27304 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
27305 the selection from outside the table.
27308 \begin_layout Section
27310 \begin_inset Index idx
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27331 \begin_layout Subsection
27335 \begin_layout Standard
27336 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
27337 have a fixed location.
27339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27346 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
27354 \begin_inset space ~
27359 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
27360 too many notes on the current page.
27363 \begin_layout Standard
27364 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
27365 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
27366 and pages without text.
27367 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
27368 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
27369 Floats are therefore numbered.
27370 Referencing is described in section
27371 \begin_inset space ~
27375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27377 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27384 \begin_layout Standard
27385 To insert a float, use the menu
27387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27391 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
27392 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
27394 After the label you can insert the caption text.
27395 \begin_inset Index idx
27400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27402 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27416 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
27417 paragraph within the float.
27418 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
27419 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
27420 left-clicking on the box label.
27421 A closed float box looks like this:
27422 \begin_inset Graphics
27423 filename clipart/float.png
27428 – a gray button with a red label.
27431 \begin_layout Standard
27432 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
27434 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
27437 \begin_layout Subsection
27439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27441 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
27446 \begin_inset Index idx
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27453 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27470 \begin_layout Standard
27472 \begin_inset space ~
27476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27478 reference "fig:A-star-in"
27482 was created using the menu
27484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27485 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
27491 arg "float-insert figure"
27495 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
27498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27504 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
27508 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
27509 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
27511 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27513 \begin_inset space ~
27521 arg "layout-paragraph"
27527 \begin_layout Standard
27528 \begin_inset Float figure
27535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27537 \begin_inset Graphics
27538 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
27547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27548 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27553 name "fig:A-star-in"
27570 \begin_layout Standard
27571 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
27572 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
27574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27583 ) and refer to it using the menu
27585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27591 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27595 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
27596 vague references like
27597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27604 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
27605 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
27607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27615 For more about cross-references, see section
27616 \begin_inset space ~
27620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27622 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27629 \begin_layout Standard
27630 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
27631 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
27632 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
27633 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
27634 as described in section
27635 \begin_inset space ~
27639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27641 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27647 \begin_inset space ~
27651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27653 reference "fig:Two-images"
27657 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
27658 You can also set the images one below the other.
27660 \begin_inset space ~
27664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27666 reference "fig:Undefinable"
27671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27673 reference "fig:Star"
27677 are the subfigures.
27680 \begin_layout Standard
27681 \begin_inset Float figure
27688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27693 \begin_inset Float figure
27700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27701 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27706 name "fig:Undefinable"
27718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27719 \begin_inset Graphics
27720 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
27732 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27736 \begin_inset Float figure
27743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27744 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27762 \begin_inset Graphics
27763 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
27775 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27782 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27787 name "fig:Two-images"
27804 \begin_layout Subsection
27806 \begin_inset Index idx
27811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27813 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27831 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
27833 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27834 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
27837 or the toolbar button
27840 arg "float-insert table"
27844 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
27845 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
27846 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
27848 \begin_inset space ~
27852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27854 reference "tab:Table-float"
27861 \begin_layout Standard
27862 \begin_inset Float table
27869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27870 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27875 name "tab:Table-float"
27887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27889 \begin_inset Tabular
27890 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
27891 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27892 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27893 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27894 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28021 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
28029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28042 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
28045 \end{array}\right]$
28053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28066 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
28087 \begin_layout Subsection
28089 \begin_inset Index idx
28094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28096 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 \begin_layout Standard
28115 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
28116 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
28117 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
28119 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
28127 \begin_inset space ~
28135 \begin_layout Section
28137 \begin_inset Index idx
28142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28151 \begin_layout Standard
28153 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
28155 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
28156 \begin_inset space \space{}
28162 \begin_layout Standard
28163 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
28164 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
28166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28170 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
28171 and its alignment within the page.
28174 \begin_layout Standard
28176 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28186 height_special "totalheight"
28191 backgroundcolor "none"
28194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28197 This is a minipage.
28198 The text is set in an italic style.
28201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28204 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
28205 another formatting.
28213 \begin_layout Standard
28214 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
28217 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
28221 as described in section
28222 \begin_inset space ~
28226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28228 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
28233 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
28239 \begin_layout Standard
28240 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28250 height_special "totalheight"
28255 backgroundcolor "none"
28258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28259 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
28260 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
28266 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28270 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28280 height_special "totalheight"
28285 backgroundcolor "none"
28288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28289 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
28290 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
28298 \begin_layout Standard
28299 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28306 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
28308 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
28315 \begin_inset space ~
28323 \begin_layout Chapter
28324 Mathematical Formulas
28325 \begin_inset Index idx
28330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28337 \begin_inset Index idx
28342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28344 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
28347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28361 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
28368 \begin_layout Standard
28369 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
28374 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
28377 \begin_layout Section
28379 \begin_inset Index idx
28384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28386 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28403 \begin_layout Standard
28404 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
28417 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
28419 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
28420 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
28421 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
28423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28429 \begin_layout Standard
28430 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
28434 \begin_inset space ~
28439 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
28442 \begin_layout Standard
28443 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
28444 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
28447 \begin_layout Standard
28448 This is a line with an inline formula
28449 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
28455 \begin_layout Standard
28456 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
28457 paragraph, like this one:
28458 \begin_inset Formula
28465 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
28468 \begin_layout Standard
28470 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
28472 For example, typing
28473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28486 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
28487 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
28491 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
28494 \begin_inset space ~
28502 \begin_layout Subsection
28503 Navigating in Formulas
28504 \begin_inset Index idx
28509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28511 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28528 \begin_layout Standard
28529 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
28530 achieved with the arrow keys.
28532 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
28533 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
28538 will leave a formula construct (a square root
28539 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
28543 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
28547 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
28550 \end{array}\right]$
28558 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
28563 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
28564 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
28567 \begin_layout Standard
28572 , printed in this document as
28573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28577 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28584 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
28585 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
28586 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
28591 For example, if you want
28592 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
28600 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28610 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28614 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28619 , since in the latter case only the
28622 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
28627 will be under the square root sign:
28628 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
28634 \begin_layout Standard
28635 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
28637 \begin_inset Formula
28639 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28648 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
28649 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
28652 \begin_layout Subsection
28656 \begin_layout Standard
28657 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
28658 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
28662 and a cursor movement key to select text.
28663 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
28664 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
28665 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
28666 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
28670 \begin_layout Subsection
28671 Exponents and Subscripts
28672 \begin_inset Index idx
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28679 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28694 \begin_inset Index idx
28699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28701 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28718 \begin_layout Standard
28719 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
28722 arg "math-superscript"
28728 arg "math-subscript"
28731 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
28733 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
28736 , type in a formula
28739 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28749 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
28755 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
28759 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
28765 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28771 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
28773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 , you have to use an extra
28784 to separate the circumflex and the character.
28785 For example, if you want
28786 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
28792 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28798 Subscripts are similar: To get
28799 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
28805 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28813 \begin_layout Subsection
28815 \begin_inset Index idx
28820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28822 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28839 \begin_layout Standard
28840 Create a fraction either with the command
28846 or by using the icon
28849 arg "math-insert \\frac"
28855 \begin_inset space ~
28861 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
28862 The cursor is above the fraction line.
28863 To move it to the bottom, simply press
28868 To move back up, press
28873 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
28874 \begin_inset Formula
28876 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
28879 \end{array}\right)}\right]
28887 \begin_layout Subsection
28889 \begin_inset Index idx
28894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28896 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28913 \begin_layout Standard
28914 Roots can be created using the
28917 \begin_inset space ~
28925 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
28931 arg "math-insert \\root"
28953 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
28959 always produces a square root.
28962 \begin_layout Subsection
28963 Operators with Limits
28964 \begin_inset Index idx
28969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28971 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28986 \begin_inset Index idx
28991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28993 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29010 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
29017 \begin_layout Standard
29019 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
29023 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
29026 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
29027 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29028 by entering them as you would enter a super-
29029 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
29030 The sum operator will automatically place its
29031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29038 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
29040 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
29044 \begin_inset Formula
29046 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
29051 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
29055 \begin_layout Standard
29056 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
29058 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
29059 behind the operator and using the menu
29061 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29062 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29064 \begin_inset space ~
29068 \begin_inset space ~
29082 \begin_layout Standard
29083 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
29084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29092 \begin_inset Index idx
29097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29099 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29114 \begin_inset Formula
29116 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
29121 which will place the
29122 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
29126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29134 In inline formulas it looks like this:
29135 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
29141 \begin_layout Standard
29142 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
29149 Have a look at section
29150 \begin_inset space ~
29154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29156 reference "subsec:Functions"
29160 for an explanation of function macros.
29163 \begin_layout Subsection
29165 \begin_inset Index idx
29170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29172 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29189 \begin_layout Standard
29190 Most math symbols can be found in the
29193 \begin_inset space ~
29198 under one of several categories; including
29215 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
29219 \begin_layout Standard
29220 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29221 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
29222 don't have to use the
29225 \begin_inset space ~
29230 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
29232 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
29235 \begin_layout Subsection
29237 \begin_inset Index idx
29242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29244 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29261 \begin_layout Standard
29262 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
29268 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
29274 \begin_inset space ~
29282 arg "math-insert \\space"
29286 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
29287 For example, the sequence
29292 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
29295 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29297 \begin_inset Graphics
29298 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
29303 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
29304 the space marker and enter space again several times.
29305 With every space enter the size will be changed.
29306 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
29307 , because they are negative
29309 Here are two examples:
29312 \begin_layout Standard
29322 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
29328 \begin_layout Standard
29338 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
29344 \begin_layout Subsection
29346 \begin_inset Index idx
29351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29353 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29370 name "subsec:Functions"
29377 \begin_layout Standard
29381 \begin_inset space ~
29386 contains under the button
29389 arg "math-insert \\functions"
29392 a number of function macros, such as
29393 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
29397 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
29405 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
29412 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
29413 avoid confusions, because
29414 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
29418 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
29424 \begin_layout Standard
29425 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
29427 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
29431 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
29437 \begin_layout Standard
29438 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
29439 are placed, as described in section
29440 \begin_inset space ~
29444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29446 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
29453 \begin_layout Subsection
29455 \begin_inset Index idx
29460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29462 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29479 \begin_layout Standard
29480 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
29482 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
29483 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29484 commands, for example, to enter
29485 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
29488 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
29489 Our example is entered by typing
29494 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29501 \begin_inset space ~
29505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29507 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
29511 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
29514 \begin_layout Standard
29515 \begin_inset Float table
29522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29523 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29528 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
29532 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
29540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29542 \begin_inset Tabular
29543 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
29544 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29545 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29546 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29547 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29631 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
29641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29685 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
29695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29739 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
29749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29793 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
29803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29847 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
29857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29901 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
29911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29955 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
29965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30009 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
30019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30063 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
30073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30108 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
30129 \begin_layout Standard
30130 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
30133 \begin_inset space ~
30141 arg "math-insert \\hat"
30144 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
30148 \begin_layout Section
30149 Brackets and Delimiters
30150 \begin_inset Index idx
30155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30157 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30172 \begin_inset Index idx
30177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30179 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30196 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
30206 For some purposes, using just the keys
30211 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
30212 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
30213 toolbar delimiter icon
30216 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
30220 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
30221 \begin_inset Formula
30223 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
30231 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
30232 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
30236 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
30239 and the expression on the right was entered using the
30245 \begin_inset Formula
30247 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
30255 \begin_layout Standard
30256 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
30257 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30262 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
30263 left side and right side.
30264 If you use the option
30267 \begin_inset space ~
30272 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
30273 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
30275 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
30280 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
30281 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
30284 \begin_layout Standard
30285 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
30286 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
30287 is to go inside the brackets.
30288 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
30293 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
30294 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
30295 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
30299 arg "math-delim ( )"
30305 \begin_layout Section
30306 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
30307 \begin_inset Index idx
30312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30314 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30329 \begin_inset Index idx
30334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30336 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30351 \begin_inset Index idx
30356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30358 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30362 Multi-line Equations
30375 \begin_layout Standard
30376 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30380 \begin_inset space ~
30388 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
30392 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
30393 Here is an example:
30394 \begin_inset Formula
30396 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
30405 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
30406 \begin_inset space ~
30410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30412 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
30417 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
30418 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
30419 This alignment is set in the box
30424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30473 for every column as default.
30474 For example, the sequence
30475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30486 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
30487 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
30488 corresponds to the relevant column.
30489 The result will look like this:
30490 \begin_inset Formula
30493 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
30494 column & has & has\,right\\
30495 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30505 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
30508 arg "newline-insert newline"
30511 while the cursor is in the matrix.
30512 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
30514 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30517 or the math toolbar.
30520 \begin_layout Standard
30521 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
30522 It can be created with the menu
30524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30525 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30527 \begin_inset space ~
30539 Here is an example:
30540 \begin_inset Formula
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30558 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
30561 arg "newline-insert newline"
30565 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
30570 arg "newline-insert newline"
30573 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
30574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30581 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
30582 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
30583 A new row is created by every further entry of
30586 arg "newline-insert newline"
30590 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
30591 Here is an example:
30592 \begin_inset Formula
30594 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
30595 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
30600 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
30601 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
30602 \begin_inset Formula
30604 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
30612 \begin_layout Standard
30613 The multi-line formula type described here is called
30620 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
30621 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
30622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30624 reference "eq:asquared"
30629 The other types are described in section
30630 \begin_inset space ~
30634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30636 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30643 \begin_layout Section
30644 Formula Numbering and Referencing
30645 \begin_inset Index idx
30650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30652 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 \begin_inset Index idx
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30674 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30678 Referencing formulas
30689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30691 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30698 \begin_layout Standard
30699 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
30701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30702 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30704 \begin_inset space ~
30708 \begin_inset space ~
30716 arg "math-number-toggle"
30720 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30721 within parentheses.
30722 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
30723 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
30724 the document class.
30725 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
30726 separated by a dot:
30727 \begin_inset Formula
30737 arg "math-number-toggle"
30740 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
30741 You can only number displayed formulas.
30744 \begin_layout Standard
30745 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
30747 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30748 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30750 \begin_inset space ~
30754 \begin_inset space ~
30762 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
30765 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
30766 \begin_inset Formula
30769 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
30775 To number all lines use the shortcut
30778 arg "math-number-toggle"
30784 \begin_layout Standard
30785 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30788 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
30789 A label is inserted with the menu
30791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30800 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
30801 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
30802 It is recommended that you use the suggested
30803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30814 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
30815 label type when you have many labels in your document.
30816 We inserted in the following example the label
30817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30824 in the second line:
30825 \begin_inset Formula
30827 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
30828 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
30833 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
30834 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
30835 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
30837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30839 \begin_inset space ~
30847 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30851 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
30852 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30853 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
30854 as the formula number:
30857 \begin_layout Standard
30858 This is a cross-reference to equation (
30859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30861 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30868 \begin_layout Standard
30869 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
30870 's cross-reference box are described in section
30871 \begin_inset space ~
30875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30877 reference "sec:Cross-References"
30882 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
30890 \begin_layout Section
30891 User defined math macros
30892 \begin_inset Index idx
30897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30916 \begin_layout Standard
30918 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
30919 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
30920 Math macros are explained in section
30923 \begin_inset space ~
30935 \begin_layout Section
30939 \begin_layout Subsection
30941 \begin_inset Index idx
30946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30965 \begin_layout Standard
30966 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
30967 To set a font in a formula, use the
30970 \begin_inset space ~
30978 arg "math-insert \\font"
30981 , or enter its command, listed in table
30982 \begin_inset space ~
30986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30988 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30995 \begin_layout Standard
30996 \begin_inset Float table
31003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31009 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
31013 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
31021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31023 \begin_inset Tabular
31024 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
31025 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31026 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31027 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31059 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
31067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31086 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
31094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
31121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31146 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
31154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31173 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
31181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31195 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
31196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31201 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
31202 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
31210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31215 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
31227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31231 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
31239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31265 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
31273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
31288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31293 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
31301 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
31309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31314 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
31326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31330 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
31338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31364 \begin_layout Standard
31365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31373 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
31376 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
31378 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
31382 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
31401 \begin_layout Standard
31402 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
31403 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
31408 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a
31409 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
31411 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
31414 space when you need a space in the box.
31415 Here is an example where
31416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31427 denotes the set of numbers:
31428 \begin_inset Formula
31430 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
31438 \begin_layout Standard
31439 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
31440 You can, for example, put a character in
31449 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
31453 \begin_inset Newline newline
31456 So it is better not to use this feature.
31459 \begin_layout Standard
31460 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
31461 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
31465 \begin_inset Newline newline
31468 You can only print them emboldened using the command
31474 , which works like the other typeface commands:
31475 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
31481 \begin_layout Standard
31488 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
31491 \begin_layout Standard
31492 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
31494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31495 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31497 \begin_inset space ~
31505 \begin_layout Subsection
31507 \begin_inset Index idx
31512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31514 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31531 \begin_layout Standard
31532 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
31534 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
31538 \begin_inset space ~
31542 \begin_inset space ~
31550 \begin_inset space ~
31558 arg "math-insert \\font"
31562 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
31563 in black instead of blue.
31564 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
31565 Here is an example:
31566 \begin_inset Formula
31569 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
31570 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
31579 \begin_layout Subsection
31581 \begin_inset Index idx
31586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31588 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31605 \begin_layout Standard
31606 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
31607 automatically chosen in most situations.
31625 For most characters,
31633 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
31634 and certain other structures, are set larger in
31639 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
31640 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
31641 thinks are appropriate.
31642 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
31645 arg "math-insert \\style"
31649 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
31650 For example, you can set
31651 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
31654 , which is normally in
31663 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
31667 The four styles are used in the following example:
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31671 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
31675 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
31679 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
31683 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
31689 \begin_layout Standard
31690 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
31691 is set in a particular size with the menu
31693 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31695 \begin_inset space ~
31700 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
31701 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
31702 will be adjusted to correspond.
31703 As an example here is a formula in the font size
31704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31714 \begin_layout Standard
31718 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
31724 \begin_layout Section
31725 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
31727 \begin_inset Index idx
31732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31739 \begin_inset Index idx
31744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31746 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31763 \begin_layout Standard
31765 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
31766 that are in common use.
31769 \begin_layout Subsection
31770 Enabling AMS-Support
31773 \begin_layout Standard
31774 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
31776 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
31792 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
31793 selecting the checkbox
31796 \begin_inset space ~
31800 \begin_inset space ~
31804 \begin_inset space ~
31813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31817 \begin_inset Index idx
31822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31841 \begin_inset space ~
31847 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
31848 -errors in formulas,
31849 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
31852 \begin_layout Subsection
31854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31856 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
31861 \begin_inset Index idx
31866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31868 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31872 Multi-line Equations
31885 \begin_layout Standard
31886 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
31887 provides a selection of different formula types.
31889 allows you to choose between
31910 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
31911 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31918 , for an explanation of these formula types.
31921 \begin_layout Chapter
31925 \begin_layout Section
31927 \begin_inset Index idx
31932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31941 name "sec:Cross-References"
31948 \begin_layout Standard
31949 One of \SpecialChar LyX
31950 's strengths is cross-references.
31951 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
31953 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
31954 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
31955 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
31958 \begin_layout Enumerate
31962 \begin_layout Enumerate
31963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31965 name "enu:Second-item"
31972 \begin_layout Enumerate
31976 \begin_layout Standard
31977 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
31979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31982 or by pressing the toolbar button
31989 A gray label box like this:
31990 \begin_inset Graphics
31991 filename clipart/label.png
31995 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
31997 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
31999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32032 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
32033 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
32035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32049 \begin_layout Standard
32050 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
32052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32055 or the toolbar button
32058 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32062 A gray cross-reference box like this:
32063 \begin_inset Graphics
32064 filename clipart/reference.png
32068 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
32070 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
32071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32083 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
32087 \begin_layout Standard
32088 As an alternative to
32090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32093 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
32098 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
32099 to the actual cursor position via the menu
32101 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32113 \begin_layout Standard
32114 Here is our cross-reference: Item
32115 \begin_inset space ~
32119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32121 reference "enu:Second-item"
32128 \begin_layout Standard
32129 It is recommended to use a
32130 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
32132 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
32139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32140 described in section
32141 \begin_inset space ~
32145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32147 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
32156 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
32157 line breaks between them.
32160 \begin_layout Standard
32161 There are eight formats of cross-references:
32164 \begin_layout Description
32165 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
32166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32168 reference "fig:Two-images"
32175 \begin_layout Description
32176 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
32177 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
32179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32189 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32196 \begin_layout Description
32197 <page>: prints the page number: Page
32198 \begin_inset space ~
32202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32203 LatexCommand pageref
32204 reference "fig:Two-images"
32211 \begin_layout Description
32213 \begin_inset space ~
32217 \begin_inset space ~
32220 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
32221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32222 LatexCommand vpageref
32223 reference "fig:Two-images"
32228 \begin_inset Newline newline
32231 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
32232 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
32233 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
32234 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
32235 it prints “on the next page”.
32236 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
32239 \begin_layout Description
32241 \begin_inset space ~
32245 \begin_inset space ~
32249 \begin_inset space ~
32252 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
32253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32255 reference "fig:Two-images"
32260 \begin_inset Newline newline
32263 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
32269 ; otherwise it behaves like
32273 \begin_inset space ~
32277 \begin_inset space ~
32286 \begin_layout Description
32288 \begin_inset space ~
32291 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
32292 \begin_inset Newline newline
32296 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32304 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32314 \begin_inset Index idx
32319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32322 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32337 \begin_inset Index idx
32342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32345 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32365 \begin_inset Newline newline
32368 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
32369 -package should be used for this feature by setting
32372 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
32376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32377 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32385 is the default and preferred because
32389 supports only English documents.
32390 The format is specified by using the command
32394 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
32403 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32404 preamble of the document.
32405 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
32407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32423 \begin_inset Newline newline
32430 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
32435 \begin_inset Newline newline
32446 predefines reference formats for all available types.
32447 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
32449 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
32450 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
32455 , you might do so as follows:
32456 \begin_inset Newline newline
32463 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
32464 format{prop}{Proposition
32469 \begin_inset Newline newline
32472 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
32473 the package documentation
32474 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32476 key "prettyref,refstyle"
32482 \begin_inset Newline newline
32493 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
32500 \begin_layout Description
32502 \begin_inset space ~
32505 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
32506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32507 LatexCommand nameref
32508 reference "fig:Two-images"
32515 \begin_layout Description
32517 \begin_inset space ~
32520 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32521 label for the reference:
32522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32523 LatexCommand labelonly
32524 reference "fig:Two-images"
32529 \begin_inset Newline newline
32532 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
32533 Code, if you want to issue a command
32534 that \SpecialChar LyX
32540 , then you may want to use the
32543 \begin_inset space ~
32548 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
32550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32558 This is the form needed for e.
32559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32563 \begin_inset space \space{}
32570 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
32571 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32573 The varieties are adjusted in the field
32577 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
32581 \begin_layout Standard
32582 You can only use the style
32586 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
32590 is always possible.
32593 \begin_layout Standard
32594 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
32595 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
32597 Referencing formulas is explained in section
32598 \begin_inset space ~
32602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32604 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
32611 \begin_layout Standard
32612 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
32616 \begin_inset space ~
32620 \begin_inset space ~
32625 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
32626 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
32627 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
32630 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
32633 \begin_inset space ~
32638 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
32639 You can also go back with the toolbar button
32642 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
32646 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
32647 or, using the menu:
32649 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
32650 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
32658 \begin_layout Standard
32659 You can change labels at any time.
32660 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
32662 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
32664 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
32665 change them all manually
32670 \begin_layout Standard
32671 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
32673 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32678 References are described in detail in the section
32689 \begin_layout Section
32690 Table of Contents and other Listings
32691 \begin_inset Index idx
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32703 \begin_inset Index idx
32708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32710 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32725 \begin_inset Index idx
32730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32746 \begin_layout Subsection
32748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32750 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
32757 \begin_layout Standard
32758 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
32760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32761 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32763 \begin_inset space ~
32767 \begin_inset space ~
32773 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
32775 If you click on it, the
32779 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
32780 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
32781 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
32783 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32785 \begin_inset space ~
32790 that is described in section
32791 \begin_inset space ~
32795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32797 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
32804 \begin_layout Standard
32805 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
32806 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
32808 \begin_inset space ~
32812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32814 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
32818 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
32820 \begin_inset space ~
32824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32826 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
32830 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
32832 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
32835 \begin_layout Subsection
32836 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
32837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32839 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
32846 \begin_layout Standard
32847 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
32849 You can insert them via the
32851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32852 List/Contents/References
32855 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
32858 \begin_layout Section
32859 URLs and Hyperlinks
32860 \begin_inset Index idx
32865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32872 \begin_inset Index idx
32877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32886 \begin_layout Subsection
32888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32897 \begin_layout Standard
32898 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
32900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32906 \begin_layout Standard
32907 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
32909 \begin_inset Flex URL
32912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32914 https://www.lyx.org
32922 \begin_layout Standard
32923 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
32929 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
32933 \begin_layout Standard
32934 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32942 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
32951 \begin_layout Subsection
32953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32955 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32963 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
32965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32968 or with the toolbar button
32975 The appearing dialog has two fields:
32984 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
32985 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
32986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32988 name "LyX's homepage"
32989 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32994 , an Email address like this:
32995 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32997 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
32998 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
33004 , or a link to a file.
33009 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
33017 \begin_layout Standard
33018 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
33020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33031 to the link target.
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33035 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
33036 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
33037 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
33038 the text style dialog.
33039 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
33043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33045 name "LyX's homepage"
33046 target "https://www.lyx.org"
33054 \begin_layout Standard
33055 The link text color can be changed, when the option
33059 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
33061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33062 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33066 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
33068 \begin_inset Newline newline
33076 \begin_inset Newline newline
33083 in the PDF Properties dialog.
33084 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
33088 \begin_layout Section
33090 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
33092 \begin_inset Index idx
33097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33106 name "sec:Counters"
33113 \begin_layout Standard
33115 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
33116 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33117 is its ability to manage counters.
33118 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
33119 modify counters directly.
33120 This can be done in
33121 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
33123 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
33126 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
33127 using the counter inset, which is accessible from the Edit menu.
33128 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33134 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
33135 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
33136 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
33137 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
33138 to set the section counter to four.
33145 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
33146 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
33147 These effects can also be limited to
33148 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
33150 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
33153 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
33155 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in
33156 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
33158 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
33161 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
33165 \begin_layout Standard
33167 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
33168 There are five commands you can use:
33171 \begin_layout Enumerate
33173 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
33178 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
33181 \begin_layout Enumerate
33183 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
33188 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract, if
33189 you choose a negative number)
33192 \begin_layout Enumerate
33194 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
33199 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
33202 \begin_layout Enumerate
33204 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
33207 Save value of counter:
33209 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
33212 \begin_layout Enumerate
33214 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
33217 Restore value of counter:
33219 Restores the previously saved value.
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33224 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
33225 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
33226 those that are available in the current document class.
33231 \begin_layout Section
33233 \begin_inset Index idx
33238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33247 name "sec:Appendices"
33254 \begin_layout Standard
33255 Appendices are created with the menu
33257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33259 \begin_inset space ~
33263 \begin_inset space ~
33269 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
33270 as the appendix part of the book.
33271 This part is marked with a red borderline.
33274 \begin_layout Standard
33275 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
33276 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
33277 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
33278 and the subsection number.
33279 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
33283 \begin_layout Standard
33285 \begin_inset space ~
33289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33291 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
33299 \begin_inset space ~
33303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33305 reference "subsec:Export"
33312 \begin_layout Section
33314 \begin_inset Index idx
33319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33328 name "sec:Bibliography"
33335 \begin_layout Standard
33336 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
33338 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
33339 \begin_inset space ~
33343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33345 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33352 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
33357 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
33358 \begin_inset space ~
33362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33364 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
33369 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
33370 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
33371 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
33375 using a bibliography database.
33378 \begin_layout Standard
33379 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
33380 use two bibliographies in this document, a
33384 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
33385 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
33386 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
33387 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
33388 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
33391 \begin_layout Subsection
33392 The Bibliography Environment
33393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33395 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33402 \begin_layout Standard
33407 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
33409 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
33418 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
33420 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
33421 of ASCII characters only.
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33427 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33430 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
33436 \begin_inset Newline newline
33440 \begin_inset Flex URL
33443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33445 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
33455 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33465 , a short form of its title, as the key.
33466 \begin_inset Newline newline
33473 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
33474 the number of the entry.
33479 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
33488 \begin_layout Standard
33489 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
33491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33494 or the toolbar button
33497 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
33501 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
33502 containing the available citations.
33503 Select one or more keys from the list and
33513 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
33514 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
33518 \begin_layout Standard
33519 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
33520 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
33521 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
33523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33533 \begin_layout Standard
33537 Companion Second Edition
33540 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33542 key "latexcompanion"
33550 \begin_layout Standard
33551 The \SpecialChar LyX
33552 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
33553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33564 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33571 \begin_inset Index idx
33576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33579 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33595 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
33596 the label needs to be given the form
33597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33608 Author A and Author B(Year)
33609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33616 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
33623 \begin_inset space ~
33628 in the document settings
33629 \begin_inset Index idx
33634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33636 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33652 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
33654 \begin_inset space ~
33660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33662 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
33670 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
33672 Once you have done that, the
33675 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
33677 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
33680 dialog has three input fields instead of the
33697 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
33698 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
33699 These two are madatory.
33700 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
33703 Baker, Jones, and Williams
33705 ) and in abrreviated form (
33712 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
33713 add the abbreviated form to
33717 and the full list to the optional
33725 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
33726 If specified like this,
33728 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
33729 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
33732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33739 is specified, toggling
33740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33747 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
33748 full and abbreviated list
33752 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
33753 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
33754 the citation references.
33755 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
33760 \begin_layout Standard
33761 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
33764 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33766 \begin_inset space ~
33774 arg "layout-paragraph"
33778 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
33781 \begin_layout Subsection
33782 Bibliography databases
33783 \begin_inset Index idx
33788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33807 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33814 \begin_layout Standard
33815 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
33820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33821 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
33823 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
33824 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
33829 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
33831 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
33832 your working field in a database.
33833 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
33834 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
33835 list for that document.
33836 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
33840 \begin_layout Standard
33841 The database is a text file with the file extension
33842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33853 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
33854 The format is explained in
33855 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33862 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33864 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33866 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
33872 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
33873 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
33874 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
33876 \begin_inset Flex URL
33879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33881 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
33889 \begin_layout Standard
33891 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
33892 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33893 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
33895 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
33897 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
33898 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
33899 Those are addressed by
33904 \begin_inset Index idx
33909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33912 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33927 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33928 (although it has been significantly
33929 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33939 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33940 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33941 might conversely fail to correctly
33942 handle databases that use specific
33951 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33961 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
33963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33967 \begin_inset Index idx
33972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33995 \begin_inset space ~
34000 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34009 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34011 \begin_inset Index idx
34016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34018 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34022 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34036 \begin_layout Standard
34037 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34041 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34043 \begin_inset space ~
34049 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
34050 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34058 Add bibliography to TOC
34060 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
34065 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
34066 in the document or just the cited references.
34068 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
34073 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
34074 differ from the encoding of the document.
34079 \begin_layout Standard
34080 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34081 style file is a text file with the file extension
34082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34093 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
34094 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34095 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
34096 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
34098 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
34103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34104 For information on how this is done, have a look at
34105 \begin_inset Newline newline
34109 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34111 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
34121 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34126 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
34130 \begin_layout Standard
34131 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
34134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34136 \begin_inset Index idx
34141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34143 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34158 \begin_inset Index idx
34163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34166 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34183 \begin_layout Standard
34184 Accessing a database via
34188 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34190 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
34192 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
34197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34198 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34200 \begin_inset space ~
34206 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34207 you cannot select a
34212 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
34216 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34219 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
34220 As for the styles, note the following.
34225 \begin_layout Standard
34230 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
34232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34243 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
34244 file (text file with the file extension
34245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34256 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
34257 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
34259 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
34263 \begin_layout Standard
34268 styles are not set in the
34271 \begin_inset space ~
34276 dialog, but in the document settings.
34277 \begin_inset Index idx
34282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34284 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34298 However, in the dialog in the
34302 field, which is only visible if you use
34306 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
34307 example how its heading will appear).
34308 These options are described in detail in the
34313 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34323 \begin_layout Standard
34324 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
34325 \begin_inset space ~
34329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34331 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34342 Bibliography Processors
34345 \begin_layout Standard
34346 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
34347 uses a bibliography processor,
34348 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
34349 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
34350 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34352 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
34353 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
34359 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
34360 You can do this on a general level in
34362 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34363 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34364 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
34367 or for individual documents in
34369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34370 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34374 The following variants are available by default:
34377 \begin_layout Description
34378 biber a specific, modern processor
34379 \begin_inset Index idx
34384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34387 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34401 developed exclusively for
34405 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34411 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
34416 makes use of; if you use the
34420 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
34427 \begin_layout Description
34428 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
34429 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
34430 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
34434 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
34437 \begin_layout Description
34438 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
34439 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
34443 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
34447 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
34451 features are supported.
34454 \begin_layout Standard
34455 By default (with the
34461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34462 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34476 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34477 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
34480 ), \SpecialChar LyX
34481 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
34494 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34495 -based bibliography styles).
34496 This should suit most needs.
34499 \begin_layout Standard
34500 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
34501 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
34502 (in \SpecialChar LyX
34507 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34508 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
34509 You can adjust it in
34511 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34512 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34513 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
34519 \begin_layout Standard
34520 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
34521 can add below the selection.
34522 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
34523 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34529 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34543 \begin_layout Standard
34545 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
34547 These are explained in detail in section
34549 Customizing Bibliographies
34553 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34558 Additional Features
34561 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
34565 \begin_layout Subsection
34567 \begin_inset Index idx
34572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34574 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34591 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
34598 \begin_layout Standard
34599 Many different citation formats are common, e.
34600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34604 \begin_inset space \space{}
34607 numerical citation (as
34608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34615 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
34616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34623 ) or author-year citations (as
34624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34633 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
34637 \begin_layout Standard
34638 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
34641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34642 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34646 \begin_inset Index idx
34651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34653 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34667 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
34673 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
34674 labels, is there to use
34677 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34693 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
34694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34696 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34704 With a bibliography database (see
34705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34707 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34714 ) one has in contrary to the
34718 environment full access to the formatting styles.
34719 These style formats are available:
34722 \begin_layout Description
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34727 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34728 -based approached without any additional packages
34729 (simple numeric citations).
34732 \begin_layout Description
34733 Biblatex loads the package
34738 \begin_inset Index idx
34743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34746 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34760 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
34762 Biblatex citation style
34766 Biblatex bibliography style
34769 Options to the package
34773 can be entered in the
34780 \begin_layout Description
34782 \begin_inset space ~
34786 \begin_inset space ~
34789 mode) loads the package
34793 with the natbib compatibility mode.
34794 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
34806 behavior very closely.
34811 this option has some additional styles.
34816 styles are also supported by this variant.
34819 \begin_layout Description
34821 \begin_inset space ~
34824 (BibTeX) loads the package
34829 \begin_inset Index idx
34834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34837 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34851 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
34854 \begin_layout Description
34856 \begin_inset space ~
34859 (BibTeX) loads the package
34864 \begin_inset Index idx
34869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34872 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34886 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
34889 \begin_layout Standard
34898 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
34900 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
34909 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
34911 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
34912 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
34914 Biblatex citation style
34917 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
34923 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
34927 \begin_layout Standard
34928 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
34929 are available in the
34934 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
34935 a name prefix such as
34936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34951 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
34952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34956 \begin_inset space \space{}
34960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34971 \begin_layout Standard
34972 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
34974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34978 \begin_inset space \space{}
34981 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
34983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34987 \begin_inset space \space{}
34991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35003 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35007 \begin_inset space ~
35015 \begin_inset space ~
35021 Here is a simple example where the text
35022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35033 appears after the reference:
35036 \begin_layout Quote
35038 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35041 key "latexcompanion"
35049 \begin_layout Standard
35050 All styles except for
35054 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
35056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35064 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
35068 \begin_layout Standard
35069 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
35070 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
35071 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
35076 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
35077 multi-citation (so-called
35078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35081 qualified citation lists
35082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35088 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
35093 dialog will display three columns in the field
35100 \begin_inset space ~
35108 \begin_inset space ~
35116 \begin_inset space ~
35122 If you double-click on an item's
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35133 \begin_inset space ~
35138 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
35141 General text before
35147 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
35150 \begin_layout Subsection
35152 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
35153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35155 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
35159 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
35163 \begin_layout Standard
35165 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
35167 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35174 \begin_inset space ~
35178 \begin_inset space ~
35182 \begin_inset space ~
35185 Content\SpecialChar ldots
35188 context menu if specific conditions are met:
35191 \begin_layout Itemize
35193 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
35194 If citation entries include any of the fields
35195 \begin_inset Flex Code
35198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35200 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35209 \begin_inset Flex Code
35212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35214 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35222 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
35223 \begin_inset Flex Code
35226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35228 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35236 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
35237 \begin_inset Flex Code
35240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35242 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35250 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
35253 \begin_layout Itemize
35255 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
35256 If citation entries include any of the fields
35257 \begin_inset Flex Code
35260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35262 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35270 (filled by JabRef) or
35271 \begin_inset Flex Code
35274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35276 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35284 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
35285 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
35286 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
35289 \begin_layout Standard
35291 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
35292 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
35293 also searches your disk for matching files if you
35296 Search drive for cited files
35300 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35301 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
35302 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35303 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35307 It uses the tokens supplied at
35311 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
35312 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
35313 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
35315 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
35317 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
35318 of the file (at arbitrary position).
35320 opens the first matching file it finds.
35321 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
35322 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
35323 the chance this works for you.
35328 \begin_layout Standard
35330 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
35331 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
35332 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35334 \begin_inset Flex Code
35337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35339 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
35348 \begin_inset Flex Code
35351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35353 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
35361 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the
35363 Customization manual
35368 Cite format description
35375 \begin_layout Section
35377 \begin_inset Index idx
35382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35398 \begin_layout Standard
35399 An index entry is created if you use the menu
35401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35403 \begin_inset space ~
35408 or the toolbar button
35415 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
35417 \begin_inset space ~
35421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35423 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
35427 for some advanced methods)
35431 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
35435 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
35437 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
35441 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
35445 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
35447 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
35449 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
35452 the text that appears in the index
35453 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
35454 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
35456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35463 index inset in the heading above for example)
35466 The word where the cursor is in
35467 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
35470 or the currently highlighted text
35471 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
35474 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
35476 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
35480 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
35482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35485 e., copied into the inset)
35490 \begin_layout Standard
35492 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
35493 (which prints out the index in your document)
35496 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
35497 in the document with
35498 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
35503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35504 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35512 A light blue box labeled
35513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35524 will show the place where the index
35525 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
35527 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
35531 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
35536 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
35538 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
35540 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
35543 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
35545 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
35547 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
35548 insets, as there are no settings to make.
35549 This changes if you select
35550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35553 Use multiple indexes
35554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35558 \begin_inset space ~
35562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35564 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
35572 In this case, the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings
35574 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35582 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
35583 By default, an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically
35584 ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index
35585 entry has been inserted in the document.
35586 However, you can customize index entries to look different.
35587 You can group index entries hierarchically, let the index list refer to
35588 a range of pages rather than a single page, let it refer to another entry
35589 in the index list rather than, or additionally to, a page, you can format
35590 the page reference (e.
35591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35594 g., make it bold for specific pages), and you can determine the order of
35595 an entry in the list.
35596 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
35598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35610 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings
35611 dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
35616 \begin_layout Standard
35618 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
35619 give a short overview of
35620 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
35624 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
35625 these features in turn
35626 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
35629 in the next subsections.
35630 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35631 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
35632 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35634 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35636 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
35644 \begin_layout Subsection
35646 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
35647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35649 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
35655 Grouping Index Entries
35656 \begin_inset Index idx
35661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35663 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35680 \begin_layout Standard
35681 Index entries are often
35682 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
35685 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
35686 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
35687 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
35692 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35699 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35709 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
35710 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
35713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35714 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35717 or, more easily, by pressing the
35722 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
35723 Maximally two such subentry insets, i.
35724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35727 e., three levels of grouping in total, are allowed per index entry.
35728 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in
35729 the index inset, but the order of them matters and determines the grouping
35731 In the \SpecialChar LyX
35732 file, the index entry in the header above shows an example for
35733 a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this
35734 document at the entry
35739 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35748 \begin_layout Standard
35750 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
35751 In the output, each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
35752 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they
35753 have also a separate entry (without subentry)
35754 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35755 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
35756 lists under the entry
35757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35765 First we create the entry
35766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35780 reference "subsec:Lists"
35785 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
35786 \begin_inset space ~
35790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35792 reference "sec:Itemize"
35796 , we insert the command
35799 \begin_layout Standard
35801 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35807 \begin_layout Standard
35809 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35815 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35821 \begin_layout Standard
35823 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35824 for the enumerated list in section
35825 \begin_inset space ~
35829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35831 reference "sec:Enumerate"
35840 \begin_layout Standard
35842 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
35843 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35844 , subentries are indicated by a preceding
35845 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
35849 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
35853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35861 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
35863 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
35864 , although you have to take care that the character
35868 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
35870 For this reason, a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index
35871 entry in a specific way.
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35879 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35884 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
35885 marks the grouping levels.
35889 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
35890 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
35891 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
35892 If we don't have an index entry for
35893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35900 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
35905 \begin_layout Subsection
35907 \begin_inset Index idx
35912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35914 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35931 \begin_layout Standard
35933 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
35935 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
35939 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
35940 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
35941 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
35942 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
35946 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
35948 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
35952 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
35953 index more pages under the same entry
35954 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
35955 refer to a page range instead, you can do this by inserting two index entries:
35956 one that marks the beginning of the range, the other that marks its end
35960 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
35961 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
35962 To mark start and end, select the respective
35966 option in the index inset settings dialog.
35967 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
35968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35986 \begin_layout Standard
35988 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
35989 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
35990 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found, the
35991 index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing
35992 you about the reason.
35995 \begin_layout Standard
35997 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
35998 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create an
35999 index entry in section
36000 \begin_inset space ~
36004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36006 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
36013 \begin_layout Standard
36015 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36018 Paragraph environments|(
36021 \begin_layout Standard
36023 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36024 and another entry at the end of section
36025 \begin_inset space ~
36029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36031 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
36038 \begin_layout Standard
36040 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36043 Paragraph environments|)
36046 \begin_layout Standard
36048 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36073 respectively start and end the index range.
36074 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
36075 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
36076 the pages of the indexed document parts.
36077 An example is the index entry
36078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36081 Document ! Settings
36082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36090 \begin_layout Subsection
36092 \begin_inset Index idx
36097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36099 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36116 \begin_layout Standard
36117 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
36118 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
36119 rather than, or in addition to, a page
36123 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
36124 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for
36125 an entry at different places, e.
36126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36137 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
36138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36149 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36156 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
36161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36175 \begin_layout Standard
36177 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
36178 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
36181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36182 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
36188 \begin_layout Standard
36190 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
36191 If you want a cross-reference and page references, you can use
36193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36194 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
36199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36206 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred
36207 to by page number as in
36208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36224 \begin_layout Standard
36226 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
36227 We referred for example in the index entry
36228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36236 \begin_inset space ~
36240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36242 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
36246 ) to the index entry
36247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36254 in the same section using the entry
36257 \begin_layout Standard
36259 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
36262 GIF|see{Image formats}
36265 \begin_layout Standard
36267 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
36268 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36270 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
36271 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
36276 \begin_layout Subsection
36278 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
36279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36281 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
36288 \begin_inset Index idx
36293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36295 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36312 \begin_layout Standard
36314 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
36315 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
36316 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
36321 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
36324 f you use accented characters in the index entry
36325 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
36326 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
36327 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
36328 or if you use macros
36331 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
36335 \begin_layout Standard
36337 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
36338 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
36343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36344 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
36346 \begin_inset space ~
36350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36352 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
36361 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
36362 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
36363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36387 \begin_inset Index idx
36392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36394 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36409 \begin_inset Index idx
36414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36416 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36431 \begin_inset Index idx
36436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36437 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
36442 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
36443 maïs, maison, maître.
36444 To achieve this, we use the command
36447 \begin_layout Standard
36449 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
36452 previous entry@current entry
36455 \begin_layout Standard
36457 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
36458 In our case we want to have
36459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36474 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
36477 \begin_layout Standard
36479 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
36485 \begin_layout Standard
36487 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
36488 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
36489 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
36491 See the next subsection for an example.
36492 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
36496 \begin_layout Standard
36498 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
36499 To accommodate for that, you can use
36501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36502 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
36506 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index, it is just used
36507 for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
36508 For instance, you can pass the sort key
36509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36520 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosoph
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36526 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
36527 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
36528 , sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
36530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36538 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
36539 , although you have to take care that the character
36541 For this reason, a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry
36544 \begin_inset space ~
36548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36550 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
36559 \begin_layout Subsection
36561 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
36563 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
36567 \begin_inset Index idx
36572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36574 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36591 \begin_layout Standard
36593 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
36595 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
36598 he appearance of index entries
36599 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
36600 can be formatted as usual
36602 via the text style dialog
36603 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
36604 , the toolbar or shortcuts.
36605 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in
36609 \begin_inset Index idx
36614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36616 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36622 This is an italic dummy entry
36633 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
36634 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical
36636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36648 , will be listed separately.
36650 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
36652 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
36656 \begin_layout Standard
36658 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
36662 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
36664 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
36668 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
36673 option in the index entry settings dialog.
36675 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
36676 number using the character
36677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36684 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36685 -command without a backslash.
36686 We can write for example
36687 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
36688 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
36705 With the latter, you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
36710 leading backslash, e.
36711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36715 a self-defined command
36716 \begin_inset Flex Code
36719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36721 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
36729 or an existing macro such as
36730 \begin_inset Flex Code
36733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36735 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
36748 \begin_layout Standard
36750 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
36753 italic page number:|textit
36756 \begin_layout Standard
36758 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
36759 to get the page number in italic.
36760 \begin_inset Index idx
36765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36766 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
36771 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
36772 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
36774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36790 \begin_inset space ~
36796 Have a look at section
36797 \begin_inset space ~
36801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36803 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36807 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36813 \begin_layout Standard
36815 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
36816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36824 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
36828 to generate the index, see section
36829 \begin_inset space ~
36833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36835 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
36844 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
36849 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
36850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36853 key "latexcompanion"
36868 \begin_layout Standard
36869 In general, we encourage you to
36870 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
36871 not format page numbers directly as shown above
36872 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
36873 use self-defined commands
36877 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
36878 This makes it easier to change the formatting, should you or your publisher
36879 decide to do that later.
36881 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
36882 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
36883 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
36884 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
36886 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
36890 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
36891 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed
36893 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
36894 definition of the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
36896 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
36900 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
36903 the following in the preamble
36906 \begin_layout Standard
36912 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
36914 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
36920 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
36928 \begin_layout Standard
36930 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
36932 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
36933 add the custom formatting
36934 \begin_inset Flex Code
36937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36939 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
36947 to the respective entry settings dialog.
36952 \begin_layout Standard
36954 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
36960 \begin_layout Standard
36962 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
36963 in the index entry.
36964 \begin_inset Index idx
36969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36970 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
36975 The advantage is that, i
36976 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
36977 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed
36981 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions
36982 must not be italic but bold, you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
36983 not every single index entry.
36984 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
36988 \begin_layout Standard
36990 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
36991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36996 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
37001 If you use the index processor
37007 makeindex or xindex
37010 \begin_inset space ~
37014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37016 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
37020 ), such custom macros do not work out of the box.
37025 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
37026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37033 (style file) you use before they can be used.
37034 In the given case, this would require to add the following line in the
37038 \begin_layout Verbatim
37040 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
37042 (markup-locref :open "
37044 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
37047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37049 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
37051 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37054 key "latexcompanion"
37069 \begin_layout Standard
37070 You can also change the layout
37071 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
37073 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
37078 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
37080 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
37084 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
37088 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
37092 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
37094 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
37097 get a bold font for all index entries.
37099 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
37100 In general, however, it is better (and required for
37101 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
37104 more advanced tasks
37105 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
37109 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
37112 to set up a so-called
37115 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
37138 ) to determine the formatting;
37139 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
37143 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
37145 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
37151 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
37157 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
37165 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
37173 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
37177 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
37179 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37181 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
37187 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
37189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37191 key "makeindex,xindy"
37200 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
37201 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
37202 packages available that ease such formatting, see
37204 \begin_inset Flex URL
37207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37209 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
37211 https://ctan.org/topic/index
37221 \begin_layout Subsection
37223 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
37224 Special Characters in Index Entries
37225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37227 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
37234 \begin_layout Standard
37236 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
37237 As already mentioned above, some characters have a special meaning in index
37239 \begin_inset Flex Code
37242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37244 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
37253 \begin_inset Flex Code
37256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37258 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
37267 \begin_inset Flex Code
37270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37272 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
37273 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37284 \begin_inset Flex Code
37287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37289 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
37298 If you use them literally, you might get surprising results or even a non-worki
37300 In any case, you will not get the character itself.
37303 \begin_layout Standard
37305 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
37306 In order to use these characters in inset entries, they have to be
37307 \begin_inset Quotes els
37311 \begin_inset Quotes ers
37314 , that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat
37315 this character without its special meaning.
37316 By default, the escape character is
37317 \begin_inset Flex Code
37320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37322 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
37323 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37333 (but this can be changed).
37335 \begin_inset Flex Code
37338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37340 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
37341 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37352 \begin_inset Flex Code
37355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37357 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
37358 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37369 \begin_inset Flex Code
37372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37374 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
37375 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37379 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
37390 \begin_inset Flex Code
37393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37395 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
37396 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37406 to get the special character you want.
37407 Note that the escape character,
37408 \begin_inset Flex Code
37411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37413 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
37414 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37428 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
37429 \begin_inset space ~
37433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37435 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37444 \begin_layout Subsection
37446 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
37447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37449 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
37453 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
37456 \begin_layout Standard
37458 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
37459 Indexing a document can be a tedious task, since you often have to insert
37460 the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different
37462 This is not only time-consuming, but also error-prone; e.
37463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37466 g., you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to
37467 avoid redundant entries.
37469 provides some functions to ease the task.
37472 \begin_layout Standard
37474 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
37475 First, if you want to add an entry which you already used before, you can
37476 open the outliner via
37478 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37482 \begin_inset space ~
37486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37488 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
37496 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway), scroll
37497 to the entry in question (if you check
37501 , it will be more easier), then
37505 -click on the entry and select
37507 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
37509 from the context menu.
37510 This will do just what it says: it will insert a copy of that index inset
37511 at the position where the cursor is.
37514 \begin_layout Standard
37516 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
37517 Second, \SpecialChar LyX
37518 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
37519 If you right-click on an index entry inset, you can select from the context
37522 Index All Occurrences of this Word
37525 This will search the whole document (only single documents, not master
37526 and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrenc
37527 e of the word that precedes the inset.
37528 Note that casing of the word does not matter, but only full words in the
37529 same grammatical form are considered (so if
37533 is the word before the index entry,
37537 will be considered as well, but not
37542 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the
37544 Remember, a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given
37545 word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather), but only relevant
37546 occurrences! So as convenient as this function might seem, it is suitable
37547 especially for particular cases.
37548 With others, you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted
37549 entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
37552 \begin_layout Subsection
37554 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
37556 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
37560 \begin_inset Index idx
37565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37567 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37584 name "subsec:Index-Program"
37591 \begin_layout Standard
37593 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
37595 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
37601 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
37606 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
37608 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
37613 variant of it, for that matter)
37615 for index generation; otherwise the program
37619 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
37620 distribution, is used.
37621 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
37626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37628 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
37633 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
37634 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
37635 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
37636 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
37637 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
37652 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
37653 As a further option, you can select the rather new
37660 \begin_layout Itemize
37662 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
37667 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
37668 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
37669 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly
37670 (we have shown above, section
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37677 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
37681 , how to manually fix this sorting, but this is very tedious work).
37684 \begin_layout Itemize
37686 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
37687 The alternative program,
37691 , is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
37692 It can sort most languages correctly, and it is also much more customizable
37698 is no longer actively maintained, and it has bugs that are most likely
37699 not being addressed anytime soon.
37704 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install
37705 on some systems (particularly Windows).
37706 But if you have it available, it is almost always a better option than
37714 \begin_layout Itemize
37716 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
37721 , is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
37722 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
37723 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
37724 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
37726 much customizable and supports many languages.
37727 The program is still in development, so not everything might work equally
37728 well than in the older processors.
37729 But the program is definitely worth a try, particularly if
37733 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
37738 \begin_layout Standard
37740 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
37742 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
37746 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
37748 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
37751 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
37752 's preferences dialog,
37754 \begin_inset space ~
37758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37760 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
37765 The available options are listed and explained in
37766 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
37768 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37770 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
37776 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
37778 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37780 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
37788 In this dialog, you can
37789 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
37791 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
37795 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
37797 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
37800 alternative program
37801 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
37804 to generate the index.
37807 \begin_layout Standard
37808 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
37809 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
37812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37813 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37817 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
37818 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
37821 \begin_layout Subsection
37823 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
37824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37826 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37835 \begin_layout Standard
37836 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
37837 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
37838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37845 next to the standard index.
37847 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
37848 that add this feature.
37855 \begin_inset Index idx
37860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37863 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37877 package to generate multiple indexes.
37878 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
37883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37884 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
37886 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37894 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37895 style, but it also includes
37896 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
37897 Please consult the package's manual for details.
37905 \begin_layout Standard
37906 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
37907 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
37909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37910 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37913 and select the option
37915 Use multiple Indexes
37922 already contains the standard index
37923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37931 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
37932 also appear as a heading) to the
37936 input field and press the
37941 The new index now also appears in the list.
37942 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
37943 label color to the new index.
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37947 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
37950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37951 List/Contents/References
37957 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
37958 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
37959 are additional features:
37962 \begin_layout Itemize
37963 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
37964 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
37967 \begin_layout Itemize
37968 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
37969 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
37974 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
37975 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
37976 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
37977 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
37980 \begin_layout Itemize
37985 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
37986 code in the name of the index.
37989 \begin_layout Section
37990 Nomenclature/Glossary
37991 \begin_inset Index idx
37996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38003 \begin_inset Index idx
38008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38010 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
38013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38027 name "sec:Nomenclature"
38034 \begin_layout Standard
38035 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
38036 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
38037 called nomenclature or glossary.
38040 \begin_layout Standard
38041 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38048 \begin_inset Index idx
38053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38056 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38071 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38073 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38080 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38084 \begin_layout Standard
38085 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
38086 and then use the menu
38088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38094 \begin_inset space ~
38099 or the toolbar button
38102 arg "nomencl-insert"
38107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38118 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
38121 \begin_layout Standard
38122 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
38123 The first is the term or
38127 that you wish to define.
38132 of the term or symbol.
38135 \begin_layout Standard
38136 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 To use \SpecialChar TeX
38145 code for nomenclature entries the option
38149 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
38157 \begin_layout Subsection
38158 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
38159 \begin_inset Index idx
38164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38166 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38183 \begin_layout Standard
38184 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
38188 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
38191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38195 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38203 \begin_inset Newline newline
38211 \begin_inset Newline newline
38217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38224 character starts/ends the formula.
38225 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
38226 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
38228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38238 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
38248 \begin_layout Standard
38249 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38250 syntax is given in section
38251 \begin_inset space ~
38255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38257 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38264 \begin_layout Standard
38268 \begin_inset space ~
38273 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
38275 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
38276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38280 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38287 in this document is:
38288 \begin_inset Newline newline
38293 dummy entry for the character
38298 \begin_inset Newline newline
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38320 font use the command
38349 \begin_layout Standard
38350 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
38351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38355 \begin_inset space \space{}
38359 \begin_inset Newline newline
38375 \begin_inset Newline newline
38378 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
38379 This command will make the font of all symbols
38386 \begin_inset space ~
38394 \begin_layout Standard
38395 If the characters |
38396 \begin_inset space \space{}
38400 \begin_inset space \space{}
38404 \begin_inset space \space{}
38408 \begin_inset space \space{}
38412 \begin_inset space \space{}
38415 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
38416 code they need to be escaped
38418 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
38420 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
38423 character in front of them.
38424 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
38426 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
38427 LatexCommand nomenclature
38428 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
38429 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
38435 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
38437 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
38438 LatexCommand nomenclature
38439 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
38440 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
38450 \begin_layout Subsection
38451 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
38452 \begin_inset Index idx
38457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38476 \begin_layout Standard
38477 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38478 -code of the symbol
38480 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
38482 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
38485 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
38486 LatexCommand nomenclature
38488 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
38496 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
38501 LatexCommand nomenclature
38504 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
38510 They will be sorted by
38511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38537 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38540 will be sorted before the
38544 since the character
38545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38552 is considered in sorting.
38555 \begin_layout Standard
38556 To control the sort order, you can edit the
38559 \begin_inset space ~
38564 field of the nomenclature dialog.
38565 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
38567 For the example given, you can insert
38571 in this field for the
38572 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38579 will be located before
38580 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38586 \begin_layout Standard
38587 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
38592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38602 \begin_layout Subsection
38603 Nomenclature Options
38604 \begin_inset Index idx
38609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38611 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38628 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
38635 \begin_layout Standard
38640 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
38641 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
38644 \begin_layout Description
38645 refeq Appends the phrase
38646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38661 to every nomenclature entry, where
38667 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
38670 \begin_layout Description
38671 refpage Appends the phrase
38672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38687 to every nomenclature entry, where
38693 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
38696 \begin_layout Description
38697 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
38700 \begin_layout Standard
38701 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
38702 class options list in the
38704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38708 In this document the options
38715 \begin_layout Standard
38716 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
38722 \begin_layout Standard
38723 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
38724 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
38729 field in the nomenclature dialog:
38732 \begin_layout Description
38742 \begin_layout Description
38745 nomrefpage Like the
38752 \begin_layout Description
38755 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
38764 \begin_layout Description
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38774 \begin_inset space ~
38779 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
38782 \begin_layout Standard
38784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38791 are automatically translated for most document languages.
38792 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
38796 \begin_layout Standard
38805 \begin_inset Newline newline
38811 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
38814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38827 unskip, see equation
38830 \begin_inset Newline newline
38837 pagedeclaration}[1]{
38838 \begin_inset Newline newline
38844 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
38847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38848 \begin_inset space ~
38865 \begin_layout Standard
38866 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
38869 \begin_inset space ~
38874 in the document settings under
38877 \begin_inset space ~
38885 \begin_layout Standard
38893 \begin_inset Newline newline
38897 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
38900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38901 \begin_inset space ~
38913 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
38915 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
38916 \begin_inset Newline newline
38923 pagedeclaration}[1]{
38924 \begin_inset Newline newline
38928 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38932 \begin_inset space ~
38944 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
38949 \begin_layout Subsection
38950 Printing the Nomenclature
38951 \begin_inset Index idx
38956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38975 \begin_layout Standard
38976 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
38978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38979 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
38984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38995 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
38996 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
38997 You can choose between these settings:
39000 \begin_layout Description
39001 Default a space of 1
39002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39008 \begin_layout Description
39010 \begin_inset space ~
39014 \begin_inset space ~
39017 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
39020 \begin_layout Description
39021 Custom custom space
39024 \begin_layout Standard
39025 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
39026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39034 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
39042 For example, in order to change the name to
39046 , add the following line to the preamble:
39049 \begin_layout Standard
39062 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
39065 \begin_layout Standard
39066 When you are using another document language than English, replace
39067 \begin_inset Newline newline
39082 , where *** is the name of the language used.
39085 \begin_layout Subsection
39086 Nomenclature Program
39087 \begin_inset Index idx
39092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39111 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
39118 \begin_layout Standard
39124 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
39125 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
39127 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
39132 by adding options, see section
39133 \begin_inset space ~
39137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39139 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
39144 The available options are listed and explained in
39145 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39147 key "nomencl,makeindex"
39155 \begin_layout Section
39157 \begin_inset Index idx
39162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39169 \begin_inset Index idx
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39193 name "sec:Branches"
39200 \begin_layout Standard
39201 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
39202 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
39203 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
39204 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
39207 \begin_layout Standard
39208 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
39209 allows you to put text into branches.
39210 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
39211 To create a branch, either select the menu
39213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39214 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
39217 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
39219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39226 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
39227 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
39228 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
39229 and whether the name of the branch should
39230 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
39231 (see below for an example).
39232 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
39233 to the name of the other) and to add
39234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39246 \begin_inset space ~
39249 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
39250 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
39253 \begin_layout Standard
39254 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
39255 These boxes are inserted via the menu
39257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39260 where you can choose a branch.
39261 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
39265 \begin_layout Standard
39266 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
39267 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
39270 \begin_layout Standard
39271 \begin_inset Branch Question
39275 \begin_layout Standard
39280 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
39288 \begin_layout Standard
39289 \begin_inset Branch Answer
39293 \begin_layout Standard
39298 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
39306 \begin_layout Standard
39313 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39314 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39317 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
39318 Consider for example a file
39319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39326 which has the above branches.
39328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39335 is active, the PDF export file would be called
39336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39359 branch were inactive,
39360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39375 branch was active, likewise
39376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39391 branch was active, and
39392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39395 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
39396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39399 if both branches were active.
39400 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
39401 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
39407 \begin_layout Standard
39409 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
39410 It is also possible to
39411 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
39415 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
39417 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
39420 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
39425 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
39426 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
39430 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
39432 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
39435 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
39436 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
39440 \begin_inset space ~
39448 \begin_layout Standard
39449 \begin_inset Branch Answer
39453 \begin_layout Standard
39459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39466 branch is deactivated.
39472 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
39478 \begin_layout Standard
39479 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
39480 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
39481 definitions for each branch.
39482 For example you can define for the question branch
39486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39487 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39488 -syntax, see section
39489 \begin_inset space ~
39493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39495 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
39507 \begin_layout Standard
39517 \begin_layout Standard
39527 \begin_layout Standard
39528 and for the answer branch
39531 \begin_layout Standard
39541 \begin_layout Standard
39551 \begin_layout Standard
39552 \begin_inset Branch Question
39556 \begin_layout Standard
39560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39588 \begin_layout Standard
39589 \begin_inset Branch Answer
39593 \begin_layout Standard
39597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 \begin_layout Standard
39626 Now it is possible to use the
39630 question{\SpecialChar ldots
39637 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
39640 commands to obtain conditional output.
39641 Here is an example formula where only the
39648 \begin_inset Formula
39650 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
39658 \begin_layout Standard
39659 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
39667 \begin_layout Standard
39668 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
39670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39674 \begin_inset space \space{}
39677 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
39679 For this advanced usage, see the
39685 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39688 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
39692 \begin_layout Standard
39694 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
39695 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close
39696 status of all branch insets in the document we provide
39701 function, which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined
39702 context menu of branch inset.
39707 \begin_layout Section
39709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39711 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
39716 \begin_inset Index idx
39721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39730 \begin_layout Standard
39732 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
39737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39738 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39742 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
39745 allows you to set up
39746 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
39748 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
39752 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
39754 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
39758 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
39762 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
39767 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
39769 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
39773 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
39775 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
39778 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39780 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
39782 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
39790 \begin_inset Index idx
39795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39798 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39813 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
39814 which you need to enable by clicking
39816 Use Hyperref Support
39818 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by
39819 your document class or another package, the checkbox you need to click
39822 Customize Hyperref Options
39825 Among other things, hyperref
39826 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
39830 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
39832 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
39836 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
39840 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
39843 cross-references in the
39844 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
39848 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
39850 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
39854 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
39855 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
39858 table of contents entry or on a reference to
39859 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
39860 open a website or to
39862 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
39864 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
39865 Furthermore, you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
39866 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
39871 \begin_layout Standard
39872 The header information in the dialog tab
39876 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
39877 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example,
39878 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
39881 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
39882 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
39886 \begin_inset space ~
39890 \begin_inset space ~
39896 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
39899 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
39902 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author
39907 \begin_inset space ~
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39915 \begin_inset space ~
39920 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
39923 \begin_layout Standard
39925 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
39927 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
39935 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
39936 you can customize the
39937 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
39939 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
39943 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
39945 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
39949 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
39950 , and you can specify
39953 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
39955 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
39956 will look and if links for
39958 bibliographical backreferences are created
39959 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
39965 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either
39966 sections, pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39985 option allows long links to be split;
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset space ~
39996 \begin_inset space ~
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40009 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40017 colors the different links.
40018 The default colors are:
40021 \begin_layout Labeling
40022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
40027 for hyperlinks and URLs
40030 \begin_layout Labeling
40031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
40039 \begin_layout Labeling
40040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
40048 \begin_layout Standard
40049 but you can change these in the
40050 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
40052 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
40058 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
40060 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
40066 For example, in this document they were changed with the
40067 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
40071 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
40081 \begin_layout Quote
40084 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
40087 \begin_layout Standard
40089 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
40094 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
40095 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
40096 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
40101 \begin_layout Standard
40106 you can specify if PDF
40107 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
40109 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
40113 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
40114 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
40116 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for
40117 readers to navigate through the document.
40118 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
40121 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
40123 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
40127 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
40133 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
40135 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
40137 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
40140 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening
40149 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
40150 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
40151 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
40152 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
40153 when opening the PDF.
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40160 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40164 1 will only display the sections
40165 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
40166 (collapsing the rest)
40169 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
40173 \begin_layout Standard
40175 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
40180 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones
40181 described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref
40183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40190 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
40191 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
40192 \begin_inset Flex Code
40195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40197 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
40207 , not via the package options.
40208 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
40209 If you need to use one of those options, you can set them by adding
40212 \begin_layout Quote
40214 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
40217 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
40218 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
40220 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
40226 \begin_layout Standard
40228 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
40231 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40232 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40235 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
40240 \begin_layout Standard
40242 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
40247 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of
40248 the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
40250 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
40251 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions, input is
40253 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
40256 pdfversion=1.7, lang=de-DE
40259 At the point of writing this, the list of options is still rather small
40260 and not very well documented (look for a file called
40262 documentmetadata-support.pdf
40264 ), but it is expected that in the future, rather fundamental PDF properties
40265 (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF
40266 standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
40269 \begin_layout Standard
40271 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
40272 PDF properties are also used in this document.
40273 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
40279 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
40280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40292 \begin_layout Section
40294 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40298 name "sec:TeX-Code"
40305 \begin_layout Subsection
40308 \begin_inset Index idx
40313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40323 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40330 \begin_layout Standard
40331 As \SpecialChar LyX
40332 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
40333 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
40334 commands and constructs,
40337 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
40338 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
40339 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
40340 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40341 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
40342 cannot support all packages and
40346 \begin_layout Standard
40347 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
40348 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
40349 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
40353 Code box is created by the menu
40355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40362 or by the toolbar button
40375 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40384 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
40386 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
40388 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
40392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40393 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
40398 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40405 , you can write the command part
40411 in a \SpecialChar TeX
40412 Code box before the word and the closing brace
40416 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
40417 Code box behind the word.
40418 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
40419 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
40423 \begin_layout Standard
40424 \begin_inset Graphics
40425 filename clipart/ERT.png
40433 \begin_layout Standard
40437 \begin_layout Standard
40438 This is a line with a
40442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40465 \begin_layout Standard
40466 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40474 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40475 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
40476 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
40477 know that the command is finished.
40485 \begin_layout Subsection
40486 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40488 \begin_inset Argument 1
40491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40492 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40499 \begin_inset Index idx
40504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40514 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40521 \begin_layout Standard
40522 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
40523 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40524 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
40525 uses in the background.
40526 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
40527 is based on commands, you can
40528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40536 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
40537 any time if you know the right commands.
40538 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
40539 is the end of the day.
40540 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
40541 all caption labels bold.
40542 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
40544 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
40548 \begin_layout Standard
40549 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
40551 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40553 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40556 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40566 \begin_layout Standard
40567 As result you find that the package
40572 \begin_inset Index idx
40577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40580 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40595 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
40597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40600 \SpecialChar menuseparator
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40612 \begin_layout Standard
40617 usepackage[options]{package name}
40620 \begin_layout Standard
40621 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
40622 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
40623 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
40624 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
40627 \begin_layout Standard
40628 In your case the package name is
40633 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
40638 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
40639 So you add the command
40642 \begin_layout Standard
40647 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
40650 \begin_layout Standard
40651 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
40655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40656 For more commands provided by the
40660 package, have a look at its documentation,
40661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40676 \begin_layout Standard
40677 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
40679 For example if you use a
40683 class, you don't need the package
40687 , you can instead write
40690 \begin_layout Standard
40695 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
40700 \begin_layout Standard
40701 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
40702 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
40703 documentation of the document class you want to use.
40710 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
40713 \begin_layout Standard
40714 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
40715 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
40717 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40718 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
40719 Code box as described in the previous
40723 \begin_layout Standard
40724 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
40725 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40728 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40730 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
40738 \begin_layout Standard
40739 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
40745 \begin_layout Standard
40749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40759 \begin_inset Note Note
40762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40763 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
40771 \begin_layout Left Header
40772 \begin_inset Argument 1
40775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40795 \begin_inset Note Note
40798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40799 defines the header line as described below
40807 \begin_layout Center Header
40808 \begin_inset Argument 1
40811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40820 \begin_layout Right Header
40821 \begin_inset Argument 1
40824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40845 \begin_layout Left Footer
40846 \begin_inset Argument 1
40849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40870 \begin_layout Center Footer
40871 \begin_inset Argument 1
40874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40886 \begin_inset Newline newline
40890 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
40896 \begin_layout Right Footer
40897 \begin_inset Argument 1
40900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40922 \begin_layout Section
40923 Customized Page Headers and Footers
40924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40926 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
40931 \begin_inset Index idx
40936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40938 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40953 \begin_inset Index idx
40958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40967 \begin_layout Standard
40968 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40995 As a second step add in the menu
40997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40998 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41007 Custom Header/Footerlines
41010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41014 This module offers the following 6
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_layout Description
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41035 \begin_inset space ~
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41045 \begin_layout Description
41047 \begin_inset space ~
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41059 \begin_inset space ~
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_layout Standard
41070 for the different positions in the header/footer.
41071 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
41074 \begin_layout Standard
41075 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
41076 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
41078 \begin_inset space ~
41082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41084 reference "fig:Page-layout"
41088 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
41091 \begin_layout Standard
41092 \begin_inset Float figure
41099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41102 \begin_inset Tabular
41103 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
41104 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
41105 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
41106 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
41107 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
41109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
41112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
41121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41127 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
41141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41156 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41167 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
41170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41171 The normal text on the page goes here.
41172 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
41174 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
41175 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
41180 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41189 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
41203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41218 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
41232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
41241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41247 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41265 \begin_inset Caption Standard
41267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41270 name "fig:Page-layout"
41274 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
41287 \begin_layout Standard
41288 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41296 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41305 is set to “Default”.
41306 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
41315 \begin_layout Subsection
41319 \begin_layout Standard
41320 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
41321 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
41322 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
41323 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
41325 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
41327 Defining the footer line works similarly.
41330 \begin_layout Standard
41331 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
41332 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
41336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41346 \begin_layout Description
41349 thepage prints the current page number
41352 \begin_layout Description
41355 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
41358 \begin_layout Description
41361 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
41364 \begin_layout Description
41367 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
41368 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
41371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41375 \begin_inset Quotes prd
41378 because it usually goes in a left header.
41381 \begin_layout Description
41384 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
41385 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
41387 It is normally used in the right header.
41390 \begin_layout Subsection
41391 Default header/footer
41394 \begin_layout Standard
41395 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
41396 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
41397 footer has the page number.
41398 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
41399 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
41400 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41411 \begin_layout Subsection
41415 \begin_layout Standard
41416 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
41417 Some pages are different.
41418 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
41419 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
41420 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
41421 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
41422 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
41425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41426 Header and footer decoration line
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 By default, you get a 0.4
41431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41434 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
41435 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
41447 in the following way:
41450 \begin_layout Standard
41457 headrulewidth}{thickness}
41460 \begin_layout Standard
41461 where thickness is a size in standard units like
41474 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
41475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41481 \begin_layout Standard
41482 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41484 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41489 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41499 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41500 Several header/footer lines
41503 \begin_layout Standard
41504 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
41505 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
41506 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
41508 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_layout Standard
41541 headheight}{height}
41544 \begin_layout Standard
41549 is a size in standard units (e.
41550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41554 \begin_inset space \space{}
41562 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
41563 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
41564 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41565 logfile with the menu
41567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41577 \begin_inset space ~
41582 to see if you can find a warning about the package
41587 \begin_inset Index idx
41592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41595 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41610 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
41611 for your header/footer.
41614 \begin_layout Subsection
41618 \begin_layout Standard
41619 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
41620 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
41621 This example consists of the following definition:
41624 \begin_layout Description
41626 \begin_inset space ~
41635 , empty optional argument
41638 \begin_layout Description
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41643 Header empty, empty optional argument
41646 \begin_layout Description
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41657 in the optional argument
41660 \begin_layout Description
41662 \begin_inset space ~
41671 in the optional argument
41674 \begin_layout Description
41676 \begin_inset space ~
41689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41693 \begin_inset Newline newline
41697 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
41701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41704 in the optional argument
41707 \begin_layout Description
41709 \begin_inset space ~
41718 , empty optional argument
41721 \begin_layout Description
41724 headrulewidth set to 2
41725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41731 \begin_layout Standard
41732 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
41733 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
41739 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41749 \begin_layout Standard
41750 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
41756 \begin_layout Standard
41760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41764 pagestyle{headings}
41770 \begin_inset Note Note
41773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41774 switches back to page style with the default headings
41782 \begin_layout Section
41783 Previewing Snippets of your Document
41784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41786 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41791 \begin_inset Index idx
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41803 \begin_inset Index idx
41808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41810 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41827 \begin_layout Standard
41829 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
41830 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
41831 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
41834 \begin_layout Subsection
41838 \begin_layout Standard
41839 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41845 \begin_inset Index idx
41850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41853 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41867 (on some systems named simply
41872 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
41874 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41881 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41883 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
41891 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
41892 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41893 -package are automatically
41894 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
41898 \begin_layout Subsection
41902 \begin_layout Standard
41903 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
41904 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
41906 activate the option
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41926 \begin_inset space ~
41929 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
41936 \begin_inset space ~
41949 \begin_inset space ~
41954 is the multiplication factor for the size.
41957 \begin_layout Standard
41958 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41971 \begin_inset space ~
41979 \begin_layout Standard
41980 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
41981 and when you finish
41985 \begin_layout Standard
41986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41994 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
41995 generated by activating the option
41998 \begin_inset space ~
42004 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
42012 \begin_layout Subsection
42013 Selected document parts
42016 \begin_layout Standard
42017 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
42018 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
42019 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
42020 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
42022 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
42024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42028 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
42029 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
42030 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
42033 \begin_layout Standard
42034 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42041 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
42046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42053 is explained in section
42055 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
42060 \begin_inset space ~
42070 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
42071 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
42072 the final rotated boxes,
42073 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
42074 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
42076 Here is the result:
42079 \begin_layout Standard
42080 \begin_inset Preview
42082 \begin_layout Standard
42087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42091 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
42097 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
42107 height_special "totalheight"
42112 backgroundcolor "none"
42115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42140 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
42146 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
42153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 \begin_layout Standard
42169 Previewing works also for colors.
42170 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 is explained in section
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42209 \begin_layout Standard
42210 \begin_inset Preview
42212 \begin_layout Standard
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42235 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
42240 This is text within a colored, framed box.
42244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42259 \begin_layout Standard
42260 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42266 \begin_layout Standard
42267 If \SpecialChar LyX
42268 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
42269 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
42270 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
42271 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42272 packages in your document preamble that are required by
42273 the \SpecialChar TeX
42275 If \SpecialChar LyX
42276 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
42277 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
42279 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
42280 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
42281 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
42284 \begin_layout Subsection
42289 \begin_layout Standard
42290 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42291 source of the whole document or parts of it.
42294 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42296 \begin_inset space ~
42301 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42303 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
42305 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
42306 's main window, then only this selection
42307 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
42308 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
42309 the source view window.
42314 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
42315 ; but note that if you have
42316 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
42318 not just the one which is open at the time.
42321 \begin_layout Section
42322 Advanced Find and Replace
42323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42325 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
42330 \begin_inset Index idx
42335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42342 \begin_inset Index idx
42347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42356 \begin_layout Subsection
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42361 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
42362 allows for searching of complex,
42363 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
42365 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
42366 The key-features are:
42369 \begin_layout Itemize
42370 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
42371 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
42372 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
42376 \begin_layout Itemize
42377 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
42378 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
42379 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
42380 a section heading will only be found within section headings
42383 \begin_layout Itemize
42384 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
42385 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
42386 outside of mathematics environments
42389 \begin_layout Itemize
42390 Search may be widened to a specific
42395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42399 \begin_inset space ~
42402 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
42403 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
42410 \begin_layout Itemize
42411 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
42412 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
42413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42417 \begin_inset space ~
42420 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
42423 \begin_layout Subsection
42427 \begin_layout Standard
42428 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
42430 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42443 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
42446 ) or the toolbar button
42449 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42455 Advanced Find and Replace
42460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42464 \begin_layout Standard
42470 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
42474 \begin_inset space ~
42479 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
42482 arg "paragraph-break"
42486 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
42487 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
42491 arg "paragraph-break"
42494 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
42498 searches backwards.
42501 \begin_layout Standard
42505 \begin_inset space ~
42510 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
42519 \begin_inset space ~
42524 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
42527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42528 Searching for mathematics
42531 \begin_layout Standard
42532 Mathematical formulas, such as
42533 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
42536 or something more complex like
42537 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
42540 , may be searched for by typing them in the
42545 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
42546 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
42547 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
42548 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
42554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42558 \begin_layout Standard
42559 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
42560 This is done by switching to the
42564 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
42569 This way, entering in the
42576 \begin_layout Itemize
42577 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
42578 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
42581 \begin_layout Itemize
42582 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
42583 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
42586 \begin_layout Itemize
42587 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
42588 of it only within section headings.
42589 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
42590 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
42594 \begin_layout Itemize
42595 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
42596 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
42599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42603 \begin_layout Standard
42604 The entries made in the
42608 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42617 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
42621 button or alternatively press
42624 arg "paragraph-break"
42631 while the cursor is in the
42634 \begin_inset space ~
42642 \begin_layout Standard
42643 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
42645 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
42649 \begin_layout Itemize
42650 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
42651 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
42652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42659 with its typewriter version
42660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42674 \begin_layout Itemize
42675 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
42677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42681 \begin_inset Formula $R$
42685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42693 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
42697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42700 (you may want to enable the
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42711 \begin_inset space ~
42716 options and disable the
42724 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
42725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42732 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
42733 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
42737 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
42740 , or occurrences of
42741 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
42745 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
42751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42755 \begin_layout Standard
42756 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
42760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42761 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
42763 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42765 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
42775 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
42781 This is done with the context menu
42783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42784 Insert Regular Expression
42786 while the cursor is in the
42791 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
42792 expression matching rules
42796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42797 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
42800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42804 \begin_inset space ~
42807 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
42808 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
42814 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
42815 same text in the document.
42816 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
42817 Examples of using such a feature may be:
42820 \begin_layout Enumerate
42821 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
42826 editor the fraction
42827 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
42831 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
42834 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
42835 fractions with the given denominator.
42838 \begin_layout Enumerate
42839 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after
42840 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
42844 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
42847 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
42848 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
42854 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
42855 and the 'Select all'
42864 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
42869 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
42870 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
42871 Also, by inserting a
42872 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
42875 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
42876 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
42878 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
42879 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
42883 \begin_layout Description
42885 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
42886 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
42889 \begin_layout Description
42891 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42896 color colored text like cyan, yellow, etc
42899 \begin_layout Description
42901 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42906 family Roman, Sans serif, Typewriter
42909 \begin_layout Description
42911 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
42913 \begin_inset space ~
42920 \begin_layout Description
42922 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
42924 \begin_inset space ~
42928 upright, italic, ...
42931 \begin_layout Description
42933 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
42935 \begin_inset space ~
42942 \begin_layout Description
42944 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
42945 Emph/noun Semantic Markup: Emphasized, Noun
42948 \begin_layout Description
42950 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
42952 Single, Double, Wawy
42955 \begin_layout Description
42957 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
42958 Strike-through Single, With '/'
42961 \begin_layout Description
42963 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
42964 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
42967 \begin_layout Description
42969 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
42971 \begin_inset space ~
42975 title, part, chapter, section, ...
42980 \begin_layout Standard
42981 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
42982 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
42983 \begin_inset Formula $()$
42986 , and referring back to them through
42987 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
42991 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
42995 For example, try searching with the regexp
42996 \begin_inset Newline newline
43000 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
43012 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
43013 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
43018 \begin_inset Newline newline
43021 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
43024 \begin_layout Standard
43025 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
43026 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43033 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43041 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
43042 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
43043 sub-expressions is absolute.
43045 \begin_inset space ~
43049 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
43052 always refers to the first occurrence of
43053 \begin_inset Formula $()$
43056 in all entered regexps.
43064 \begin_layout Section
43066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43068 name "sec:Spellchecking"
43073 \begin_inset Index idx
43078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43087 \begin_layout Standard
43089 has a built-in spell checker.
43092 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43099 key or the toolbar button
43102 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43105 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
43106 beginning of the currently selected text.
43107 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
43108 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
43109 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
43110 scrolled so that it is visible.
43111 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
43112 n, if any could be found.
43113 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
43117 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
43118 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
43121 \begin_layout Standard
43122 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
43125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43129 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
43130 a different one at the top of the dialog.
43132 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
43133 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
43136 \begin_inset space ~
43144 arg "dialog-show character"
43147 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
43149 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
43152 \begin_layout Standard
43153 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
43154 can be downloaded from here:
43155 \begin_inset Newline newline
43159 \begin_inset Flex URL
43162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43164 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
43166 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
43167 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
43168 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
43176 \begin_inset Newline newline
43180 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
43182 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
43183 You should download
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43189 files for each language
43190 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
43195 link at the end of the opened webpage)
43198 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
43199 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43206 files into \SpecialChar LyX
43207 's installation subfolder
43215 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
43217 \begin_inset Newline newline
43220 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
43221 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
43222 but in most cases these are
43238 is the language code.
43241 \begin_layout Subsection
43245 \begin_layout Standard
43248 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43249 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43254 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43257 you can set the following things:
43260 \begin_layout Description
43262 \begin_inset space ~
43265 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
43266 should use for spell checking.
43267 Depending on your platform,
43277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43278 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
43279 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
43294 \begin_inset space ~
43297 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
43300 \begin_layout Description
43302 \begin_inset space ~
43305 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
43306 will always use the given language
43307 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
43310 \begin_layout Description
43312 \begin_inset space ~
43315 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
43317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43321 \begin_inset space \space{}
43325 This should normally not be needed.
43328 \begin_layout Description
43330 \begin_inset space ~
43334 \begin_inset space ~
43337 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
43339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43349 \begin_layout Description
43351 \begin_inset space ~
43354 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
43355 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
43356 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
43357 appear in a context menu.
43358 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
43362 \begin_layout Description
43364 \begin_inset space ~
43368 \begin_inset space ~
43372 \begin_inset space ~
43375 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
43379 \begin_layout Section
43381 \begin_inset Index idx
43386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43395 name "sec:Thesaurus"
43402 \begin_layout Standard
43404 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
43405 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
43414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43415 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43417 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
43427 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
43429 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
43430 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
43431 which are available for many languages.
43434 \begin_layout Standard
43435 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
43436 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
43440 \begin_layout Subsection
43441 Setting up the thesaurus
43444 \begin_layout Standard
43453 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
43457 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
43462 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
43464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43476 For instance, the US English files are named:
43479 \begin_layout Itemize
43483 \begin_layout Itemize
43487 \begin_layout Standard
43496 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
43497 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
43500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43501 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43502 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
43504 \begin_inset space ~
43509 ) to the path where they are installed.
43513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
43515 ies, typical locations are
43521 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
43525 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
43529 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
43532 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
43538 LibreOffice-<Version>
43545 On the Mac, the default location is
43547 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
43548 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
43549 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
43550 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
43551 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
43552 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
43560 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
43561 during the \SpecialChar LyX
43562 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
43566 \begin_layout Standard
43567 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
43569 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
43571 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
43574 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
43575 \begin_inset Newline newline
43579 \begin_inset Flex URL
43582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43584 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
43586 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
43587 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
43588 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
43598 \begin_layout Standard
43599 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
43600 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
43602 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43603 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43604 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
43606 \begin_inset space ~
43611 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
43613 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
43614 and point \SpecialChar LyX
43618 \begin_layout Standard
43619 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
43621 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
43624 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
43630 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
43633 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
43634 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
43636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43642 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43643 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43644 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
43646 \begin_inset space ~
43651 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
43654 \begin_layout Subsection
43655 Using the thesaurus
43658 \begin_layout Standard
43659 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
43661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43664 or the toolbar button
43667 arg "thesaurus-entry"
43670 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
43672 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
43674 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
43675 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
43676 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
43685 ), related terms (such as
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43697 ), compounds (such as
43700 \begin_inset space ~
43709 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
43718 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
43721 \begin_layout Standard
43722 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
43723 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
43727 \begin_layout Standard
43728 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
43729 the dictionary, such as the above
43733 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
43734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43738 \begin_inset space \space{}
43741 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
43742 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
43743 For example, looking up the word form
43747 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
43752 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
43753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43757 \begin_inset space \space{}
43768 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
43769 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
43770 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
43773 \begin_layout Section
43775 \begin_inset Index idx
43780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43787 \begin_inset Index idx
43792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43811 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
43818 \begin_layout Standard
43819 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
43820 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
43821 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
43822 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
43824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43829 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43831 \begin_inset space ~
43839 \begin_layout Standard
43840 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
43854 The color depends on the author that made the change.
43855 You can change the color in
43857 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43858 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43875 \begin_inset Index idx
43880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43882 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43896 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
43897 's status bar when the
43898 cursor is in changed text.
43899 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
43902 arg "changes-merge"
43908 \begin_layout Standard
43909 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
43911 \begin_inset Index idx
43916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43918 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43935 \begin_layout Standard
43936 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43942 \begin_layout Standard
43943 \begin_inset Graphics
43944 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
43952 \begin_layout Standard
43953 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43959 \begin_layout Standard
43960 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
43963 \begin_layout Standard
43964 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43970 \begin_layout Standard
43971 \begin_inset Tabular
43972 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
43973 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43974 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43975 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43985 arg "changes-track"
43993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44001 \begin_inset space ~
44004 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44024 arg "changes-output"
44032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44038 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44040 \begin_inset space ~
44043 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44045 \begin_inset space ~
44049 \begin_inset space ~
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44083 Jumps to the next change
44089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44098 arg "change-accept"
44106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44112 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44114 \begin_inset space ~
44117 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44137 arg "change-reject"
44145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44156 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44158 \begin_inset space ~
44167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44176 arg "changes-merge"
44184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44192 \begin_inset space ~
44195 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44215 arg "all-changes-accept"
44223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44234 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 arg "all-changes-reject"
44266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44277 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44279 \begin_inset space ~
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44316 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44318 \begin_inset space ~
44327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44350 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44352 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_layout Standard
44369 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44375 \begin_layout Standard
44376 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
44396 \begin_layout Standard
44397 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
44398 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
44399 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
44400 the next change after the current cursor position.
44401 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
44402 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
44403 step to the next change.
44404 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
44407 \begin_layout Standard
44408 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
44409 to describe a change.
44412 \begin_layout Standard
44414 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
44415 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44421 \begin_inset Index idx
44426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44429 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44444 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
44446 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44453 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44459 \begin_layout Section
44460 Comparison of Documents
44461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44463 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44468 \begin_inset Index idx
44473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44474 Comparison of documents
44482 \begin_layout Standard
44483 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
44486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44490 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
44491 file with change tracking enabled showing the
44493 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
44495 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
44499 \begin_inset space ~
44503 \begin_inset space ~
44507 \begin_inset space ~
44516 \begin_inset space ~
44520 \begin_inset space ~
44524 \begin_inset space ~
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44541 enables the change tracking option
44544 \begin_inset space ~
44548 \begin_inset space ~
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44557 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
44560 \begin_layout Section
44561 International Support
44562 \begin_inset Index idx
44567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 International support
44576 \begin_layout Standard
44577 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
44578 with any language you want.
44579 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
44580 up \SpecialChar LyX
44582 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44584 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
44592 \begin_layout Standard
44593 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
44594 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
44595 \begin_inset space ~
44599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44601 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
44608 \begin_layout Subsection
44610 \begin_inset Index idx
44615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44617 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44632 \begin_inset Index idx
44637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44639 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44654 \begin_inset Index idx
44659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44661 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44678 \begin_layout Standard
44681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44682 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44685 dialog lets you set
44687 the language, the quote style and character encoding
44692 \begin_layout Standard
44697 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44702 \begin_inset space ~
44707 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
44708 For details about the different encoding options see section
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44715 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44722 \begin_layout Subsection
44723 Keyboard mapping configuration
44724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44726 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
44733 \begin_layout Standard
44734 If you have for example a U.
44735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44738 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
44739 can use an alternate keymap.
44740 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
44745 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44746 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44747 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
44750 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
44751 \begin_inset space ~
44755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44757 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44762 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
44763 which one you want to use.
44766 \begin_layout Standard
44767 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
44768 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
44769 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
44770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44773 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
44774 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
44775 one to support the characters you want.
44776 This and many other customizations are explained in the
44783 \begin_layout Chapter
44786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44788 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
44795 \begin_layout Standard
44796 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
44797 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
44798 topic inside the user's guide.
44801 \begin_layout Section
44803 \begin_inset Index idx
44808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44827 \begin_layout Standard
44832 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
44835 \begin_layout Subsection
44839 \begin_layout Standard
44840 Creates a new document.
44843 \begin_layout Subsection
44847 \begin_layout Standard
44848 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
44849 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
44850 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
44852 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
44853 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
44859 \begin_layout Subsection
44863 \begin_layout Standard
44867 \begin_layout Subsection
44871 \begin_layout Standard
44872 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
44873 Click there on a file to open it.
44876 \begin_layout Subsection
44878 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
44882 \begin_layout Standard
44884 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
44885 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
44889 \begin_layout Subsection
44893 \begin_layout Standard
44894 Closes the current document.
44897 \begin_layout Subsection
44901 \begin_layout Standard
44902 Closes all opened documents.
44905 \begin_layout Subsection
44909 \begin_layout Standard
44910 Saves the actual document.
44913 \begin_layout Subsection
44917 \begin_layout Standard
44918 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
44919 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
44923 \begin_layout Subsection
44925 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
44929 \begin_layout Standard
44931 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
44932 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
44938 \begin_layout Subsection
44942 \begin_layout Standard
44943 Saves all opened documents.
44946 \begin_layout Subsection
44950 \begin_layout Standard
44951 Reloads the actual document from disk.
44954 \begin_layout Subsection
44958 \begin_layout Standard
44959 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
44960 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
44961 It is described in the section
44963 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
44968 Additional Features
44973 \begin_layout Subsection
44977 \begin_layout Standard
44978 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
44979 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
44981 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
44982 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
44986 \begin_layout Standard
44987 When using the menu entry
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44995 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
44999 \begin_inset space ~
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45007 \begin_inset space ~
45012 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
45013 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
45016 \begin_layout Subsection
45018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45020 name "subsec:Export"
45027 \begin_layout Standard
45028 You can export your document to various file formats.
45029 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45031 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
45032 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
45033 during its configuration.
45036 \begin_layout Standard
45037 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
45039 \begin_inset space ~
45043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45045 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45052 \begin_layout Description
45058 \begin_inset space ~
45061 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45066 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
45067 \begin_inset Newline newline
45070 Since \SpecialChar LyX
45071 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
45075 \begin_layout Description
45076 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
45082 \begin_layout Description
45084 \begin_inset space ~
45087 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
45093 \begin_layout Description
45094 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
45095 's native DVI-format.
45096 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
45097 files paths or file names in your document.
45099 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
45106 \begin_layout Description
45107 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
45108 in files paths or file names
45111 \begin_layout Description
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45120 ) DVI-format using the program
45122 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45125 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
45129 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45137 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
45145 \begin_layout Description
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45150 (cropped) the same as
45154 but with cropped page margins.
45157 \begin_layout Description
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45162 Dot text file with code in the programming language
45166 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
45171 \begin_layout Description
45175 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45183 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
45191 \begin_layout Description
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45197 \begin_inset space ~
45200 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
45204 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
45212 \begin_layout Description
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45225 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45226 source that is compilable with the program
45228 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45232 \begin_layout Description
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45241 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45242 source, additionally all images used in the document
45243 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
45247 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
45250 \begin_layout Description
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45259 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45260 source code, additionally all images used in the document
45261 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
45269 \begin_layout Description
45273 \begin_inset space ~
45282 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45283 source that is compilable with the program
45289 \begin_layout Description
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45302 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45303 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
45309 \begin_layout Description
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45314 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
45315 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
45317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45321 \begin_inset space \space{}
45326 \begin_inset space ~
45330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45345 represent the version number)
45348 \begin_layout Description
45350 \begin_inset space ~
45354 \begin_inset space ~
45357 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
45358 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
45359 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45363 \begin_layout Description
45364 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
45365 's internal XHTML engine
45368 \begin_layout Description
45370 \begin_inset space ~
45374 \begin_inset space ~
45378 \begin_inset space ~
45382 \begin_inset space ~
45385 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
45390 For the conversion the program
45399 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
45402 \begin_layout Description
45403 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
45408 \begin_layout Description
45410 \begin_inset space ~
45413 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
45415 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
45418 For the conversion the program
45427 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
45430 \begin_layout Description
45432 \begin_inset space ~
45435 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
45436 For the conversion the program
45445 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
45448 \begin_layout Description
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45453 (cropped) the same as
45456 \begin_inset space ~
45461 but with cropped page margins
45464 \begin_layout Description
45468 \begin_inset space ~
45473 PDF-format using the program
45477 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
45480 \begin_layout Description
45484 \begin_inset space ~
45488 \begin_inset space ~
45496 \begin_inset space ~
45501 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
45502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45506 \begin_inset space \space{}
45509 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
45513 \begin_layout Description
45517 \begin_inset space ~
45522 PDF-format using the program
45524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45527 , produces PDF-files directly
45530 \begin_layout Description
45534 \begin_inset space ~
45539 PDF-format using the program
45543 , produces PDF-files directly
45546 \begin_layout Description
45550 \begin_inset space ~
45555 PDF-format using the program
45559 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
45562 \begin_layout Description
45566 \begin_inset space ~
45571 PDF-format using the program
45576 , produces PDF-files directly
45579 \begin_layout Description
45583 \begin_inset space ~
45591 \begin_layout Description
45595 \begin_inset space ~
45599 \begin_inset space ~
45604 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
45605 and then exported as text using the program
45610 \begin_layout Description
45615 PostScript format using the program
45623 options see section
45624 \begin_inset space ~
45628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45630 reference "subsec:General-output"
45637 \begin_layout Description
45638 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45639 source and also code in the statistical programming
45653 it is possible to use
45657 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
45661 \begin_layout Standard
45662 If one of the menu entries
45669 \begin_inset space ~
45678 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45680 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
45682 \begin_inset space ~
45686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45688 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
45693 \begin_inset Index idx
45698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45699 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
45708 \begin_layout Subsection
45712 \begin_layout Standard
45713 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
45714 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
45717 \begin_inset space ~
45721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45723 reference "sec:Paths"
45728 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
45737 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
45738 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
45739 's preferences as described in section
45740 \begin_inset space ~
45744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45746 reference "subsec:Converters"
45753 \begin_layout Subsection
45754 New and Close Window
45757 \begin_layout Standard
45758 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45762 \begin_layout Subsection
45766 \begin_layout Standard
45767 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
45770 \begin_layout Section
45772 \begin_inset Index idx
45777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45779 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45796 \begin_layout Subsection
45800 \begin_layout Standard
45801 Described in section
45802 \begin_inset space ~
45806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45808 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
45815 \begin_layout Subsection
45816 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
45819 \begin_layout Standard
45820 Described in section
45821 \begin_inset space ~
45825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45827 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
45834 \begin_layout Subsection
45838 \begin_layout Standard
45839 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
45840 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
45843 \begin_layout Subsection
45847 \begin_layout Standard
45848 Selects the whole document.
45851 \begin_layout Subsection
45852 Find & Replace (Quick)
45855 \begin_layout Standard
45856 Described in section
45857 \begin_inset space ~
45861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45863 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
45870 \begin_layout Subsection
45871 Find & Replace (Advanced)
45874 \begin_layout Standard
45875 Described in section
45876 \begin_inset space ~
45880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45882 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
45889 \begin_layout Subsection
45890 Move Paragraph Up/Down
45893 \begin_layout Standard
45894 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
45898 \begin_layout Subsection
45900 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
45904 \begin_layout Standard
45906 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
45907 Described in section
45908 \begin_inset space ~
45912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45914 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
45923 \begin_layout Subsection
45925 \begin_inset Index idx
45930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45932 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45949 \begin_layout Standard
45950 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
45951 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
45955 \begin_layout Standard
45956 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
45957 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
45963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45964 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45966 \begin_inset space ~
45972 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
45976 \begin_layout Subsection
45978 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
45982 \begin_layout Standard
45984 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
45985 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
45990 \begin_layout Enumerate
45992 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
45993 Customize text properties by means of the
45999 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
46002 ; this is described in section
46003 \begin_inset space ~
46007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46009 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
46016 \begin_layout Enumerate
46018 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
46019 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
46021 Apply last settings
46024 \begin_layout Enumerate
46026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
46027 Change the casing of selected text (
46042 \begin_layout Subsection
46044 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
46048 \begin_layout Standard
46050 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
46051 This sub-menu only appears
46052 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
46054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
46055 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46084 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
46093 \begin_layout Subsection
46094 Table and Rows & Columns
46097 \begin_layout Standard
46098 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
46099 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
46100 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
46103 \begin_layout Subsection
46107 \begin_layout Standard
46108 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
46109 It will dissolve this inset.
46110 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
46114 \begin_layout Subsection
46118 \begin_layout Standard
46119 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
46120 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
46123 \begin_layout Subsection
46124 Increase/Decrease List Depth
46127 \begin_layout Standard
46128 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
46130 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
46131 \begin_inset space ~
46135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46137 reference "sec:Nesting"
46142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46144 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46151 \begin_layout Section
46153 \begin_inset Index idx
46158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46160 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46177 \begin_layout Standard
46178 At the bottom of the
46182 menu the opened documents are listed.
46185 \begin_layout Subsection
46186 Open/Close all Insets
46189 \begin_layout Standard
46190 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
46193 \begin_layout Subsection
46194 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
46197 \begin_layout Standard
46198 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
46201 \begin_layout Standard
46202 Math macros are described in the
46209 \begin_layout Subsection
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 Shows the outline window as described in sections
46215 \begin_inset space ~
46219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46221 reference "sec:Navigating"
46226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46228 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
46235 \begin_layout Subsection
46239 \begin_layout Standard
46240 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46248 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46255 \begin_layout Subsection
46259 \begin_layout Standard
46260 Opens a window showing console messages.
46261 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
46263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46266 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
46267 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
46268 is processing the document.
46271 \begin_layout Subsection
46273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46275 name "subsec:Toolbars"
46280 \begin_inset Index idx
46285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 \begin_layout Standard
46295 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
46297 All toolbars and the
46300 \begin_inset space ~
46318 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
46320 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
46322 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
46326 \begin_layout Standard
46328 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
46332 \begin_inset space ~
46350 \begin_inset space ~
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46367 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
46370 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
46374 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
46376 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
46390 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
46391 denoted in the menu with the suffix
46400 \begin_layout Standard
46405 state the toolbar is permanently shown
46406 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
46411 state it is never shown
46417 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
46418 or when a certain feature is enabled.
46419 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
46420 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
46421 is inside a formula or table respectively
46422 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
46423 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
46428 \begin_layout Standard
46430 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
46431 \begin_inset space ~
46435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46437 reference "sec:Toolbars"
46444 \begin_layout Subsection
46448 \begin_layout Standard
46452 \begin_inset space ~
46456 \begin_inset space ~
46460 \begin_inset space ~
46464 \begin_inset space ~
46468 \begin_inset space ~
46472 \begin_inset space ~
46477 will split \SpecialChar LyX
46478 's main window vertically while
46481 \begin_inset space ~
46485 \begin_inset space ~
46489 \begin_inset space ~
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46497 \begin_inset space ~
46501 \begin_inset space ~
46506 will split it horizontally.
46507 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
46508 to view the same document, but at different positions.
46509 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
46510 three or more documents at the same time.
46511 To close a split view, use the menu
46514 \begin_inset space ~
46518 \begin_inset space ~
46526 \begin_layout Subsection
46530 \begin_layout Standard
46531 Closes a split view.
46534 \begin_layout Subsection
46538 \begin_layout Standard
46539 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
46540 so that you will see nothing but your text.
46541 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
46542 's main window fullscreen.
46543 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
46544 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
46547 \begin_layout Section
46549 \begin_inset Index idx
46554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46556 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 \begin_layout Subsection
46577 \begin_layout Standard
46578 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
46579 \begin_inset space ~
46583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46585 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
46596 \begin_layout Subsection
46598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46600 name "subsec:Special-Character"
46607 \begin_layout Standard
46608 Here you can insert the following characters:
46611 \begin_layout Description
46616 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
46619 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
46620 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46621 -packages you have installed.
46622 You can get a complete display by checking
46625 \begin_inset space ~
46631 \begin_inset Newline newline
46635 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46643 Not all characters will be visible in the
46647 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
46648 dialog (see section
46649 \begin_inset space ~
46653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46655 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46659 ) can display every character.
46667 \begin_layout Description
46668 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
46672 \begin_layout Description
46674 \begin_inset space ~
46678 \begin_inset space ~
46681 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
46682 \begin_inset space ~
46686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46688 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
46695 \begin_layout Description
46697 \begin_inset space ~
46700 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
46703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46704 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46710 \begin_layout Description
46712 \begin_inset space ~
46715 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
46718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46719 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46725 \begin_layout Description
46727 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
46729 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
46733 \begin_inset space ~
46736 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
46737 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
46739 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
46742 line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
46746 \begin_layout Description
46748 \begin_inset space ~
46751 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
46755 \begin_layout Description
46757 \begin_inset space ~
46761 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
46762 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
46768 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
46773 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
46775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46779 \begin_inset space \space{}
46782 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
46783 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
46789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46792 To insert a fraction use the command
46797 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
46801 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
46807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46810 The visible space is hereby the character before the
46817 \begin_layout Description
46819 \begin_inset space ~
46822 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
46826 \begin_layout Description
46828 \begin_inset space ~
46832 \begin_inset Index idx
46837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46844 \begin_inset Index idx
46849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46851 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
46866 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
46868 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46874 \begin_inset Index idx
46879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46882 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46897 \begin_inset Newline newline
46900 More information about this feature can be found in the
46906 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
46912 \begin_layout Description
46913 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
46915 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
46916 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
46920 \begin_layout Subsection
46924 \begin_layout Standard
46925 Opens a submenu with the following options:
46928 \begin_layout Description
46929 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
46930 \begin_inset script superscript
46932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46941 \begin_layout Description
46942 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
46943 \begin_inset script subscript
46945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46954 \begin_layout Description
46956 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
46958 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
46962 \begin_inset space ~
46966 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
46968 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
46971 space as described in section
46972 \begin_inset space ~
46976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46978 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
46985 \begin_layout Description
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46990 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
46991 \begin_inset space ~
46995 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
46997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46999 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
47004 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
47006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47008 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
47017 \begin_layout Description
47019 \begin_inset space ~
47022 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47029 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
47036 \begin_layout Description
47038 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
47040 \begin_inset space ~
47043 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
47045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47049 \begin_inset space \space{}
47052 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
47053 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
47059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47062 To insert a fraction use the command
47067 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
47071 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
47077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47080 The visible space is hereby the character before the
47089 \begin_layout Description
47091 \begin_inset space ~
47094 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
47095 \begin_inset space ~
47099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47101 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
47108 \begin_layout Description
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47113 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
47114 \begin_inset space ~
47118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47120 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
47127 \begin_layout Description
47129 \begin_inset space ~
47132 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
47133 \begin_inset space ~
47137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47139 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
47146 \begin_layout Description
47147 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
47148 \begin_inset space ~
47152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47154 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
47161 \begin_layout Description
47163 \begin_inset space ~
47166 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
47167 \begin_inset space ~
47171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47173 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
47180 \begin_layout Description
47182 \begin_inset space ~
47185 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
47186 \begin_inset space ~
47190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47192 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
47199 \begin_layout Description
47201 \begin_inset space ~
47205 \begin_inset space ~
47208 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
47211 \begin_inset space ~
47215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47217 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
47224 for a usage example.
47227 \begin_layout Description
47229 \begin_inset space ~
47233 \begin_inset space ~
47236 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
47237 \begin_inset space ~
47241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47243 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
47250 \begin_layout Description
47252 \begin_inset space ~
47255 Break Inserts a forced line break that
47256 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
47259 justifies the remaining text as described in section
47260 \begin_inset space ~
47264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47266 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
47273 \begin_layout Description
47275 \begin_inset space ~
47278 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
47279 \begin_inset space ~
47283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47285 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
47292 \begin_layout Description
47294 \begin_inset space ~
47297 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
47298 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
47300 \begin_inset space ~
47304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47306 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
47311 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
47315 \begin_layout Description
47317 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
47319 \begin_inset space ~
47323 \begin_inset space ~
47326 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
47327 to prevent a page break at the given position.
47329 \begin_inset space ~
47333 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
47335 \begin_inset space ~
47339 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
47341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47343 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
47352 \begin_layout Description
47354 \begin_inset space ~
47357 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
47358 \begin_inset space ~
47362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47364 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
47371 \begin_layout Description
47373 \begin_inset space ~
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47380 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
47381 \begin_inset space ~
47385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47387 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
47394 \begin_layout Subsection
47396 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47400 \begin_layout Standard
47402 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47403 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
47404 The submenu allows you to insert
47407 \begin_layout Description
47409 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47411 \begin_inset space ~
47414 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
47417 \begin_layout Description
47419 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47421 \begin_inset space ~
47425 \begin_inset space ~
47428 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
47432 \begin_layout Description
47434 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47436 \begin_inset space ~
47439 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
47442 \begin_layout Description
47444 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47446 \begin_inset space ~
47449 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
47452 \begin_layout Description
47454 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47456 \begin_inset space ~
47460 \begin_inset space ~
47463 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
47467 \begin_layout Description
47469 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47471 \begin_inset space ~
47474 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
47477 \begin_layout Description
47479 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
47481 \begin_inset space ~
47485 \begin_inset space ~
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47492 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
47495 \begin_layout Description
47497 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
47499 \begin_inset space ~
47503 \begin_inset space ~
47506 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
47508 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
47511 \begin_layout Description
47513 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47515 \begin_inset space ~
47518 Name inserts the user name as specified in
47520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47521 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47527 \begin_layout Description
47529 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47531 \begin_inset space ~
47534 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
47536 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47537 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47543 \begin_layout Description
47545 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47546 Other\SpecialChar ldots
47547 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
47548 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
47551 \begin_layout Subsection
47554 List/Contents/References
47557 \begin_layout Standard
47558 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
47562 \begin_inset space ~
47583 are described in section
47584 \begin_inset space ~
47588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47590 reference "sec:toc"
47599 is described in section
47600 \begin_inset space ~
47604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47606 reference "sec:Index"
47614 is described in section
47615 \begin_inset space ~
47619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47621 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
47627 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47630 is described in section
47631 \begin_inset space ~
47635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47637 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47644 \begin_layout Subsection
47648 \begin_layout Standard
47649 To insert floats, as described in section
47650 \begin_inset space ~
47654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47656 reference "sec:Floats"
47660 and in detail the chapter
47667 \begin_inset space ~
47675 \begin_layout Subsection
47679 \begin_layout Standard
47680 To insert notes, described in section
47681 \begin_inset space ~
47685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47687 reference "sec:Notes"
47694 \begin_layout Subsection
47698 \begin_layout Standard
47699 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
47701 Branches are described in section
47702 \begin_inset space ~
47706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47708 reference "sec:Branches"
47715 \begin_layout Subsection
47719 \begin_layout Standard
47720 Inserts document class-specific insets.
47721 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
47723 An example is the document class
47724 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
47726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47734 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
47738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47743 with three custom insets.
47746 Flex insets and InsetLayout
47750 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
47756 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
47759 \begin_layout Subsection
47761 \begin_inset Index idx
47766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47775 \begin_layout Standard
47776 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
47778 For more information see chapter
47780 External Document Parts
47783 \begin_inset space ~
47789 \begin_layout Subsection
47791 \begin_inset Index idx
47796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47805 \begin_layout Standard
47806 Inserts a box in a certain style.
47807 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
47814 \begin_inset space ~
47822 \begin_layout Subsection
47826 \begin_layout Standard
47831 dialog as described in section
47832 \begin_inset space ~
47836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47838 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47845 \begin_layout Subsection
47849 \begin_layout Standard
47854 as described in section
47855 \begin_inset space ~
47859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47861 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47868 \begin_layout Subsection
47872 \begin_layout Standard
47877 as described in section
47878 \begin_inset space ~
47882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47884 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47891 \begin_layout Subsection
47893 \begin_inset Index idx
47898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47905 \begin_inset Index idx
47910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47912 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47922 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47939 \begin_layout Standard
47940 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
47941 Floats are described in section
47942 \begin_inset space ~
47946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47948 reference "sec:Floats"
47952 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
47955 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
47963 \begin_inset space ~
47971 \begin_layout Subsection
47975 \begin_layout Standard
47976 Inserts an index entry as described in section
47977 \begin_inset space ~
47981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47983 reference "sec:Index"
47990 \begin_layout Subsection
47994 \begin_layout Standard
47995 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
47996 \begin_inset space ~
48000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48002 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
48009 \begin_layout Subsection
48013 \begin_layout Standard
48014 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
48015 Tables are described in section
48016 \begin_inset space ~
48020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48022 reference "sec:Tables"
48026 and in detail in the chapter
48033 \begin_inset space ~
48041 \begin_layout Subsection
48045 \begin_layout Standard
48051 Graphics are described in section
48052 \begin_inset space ~
48056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48058 reference "sec:Graphics"
48065 \begin_layout Subsection
48069 \begin_layout Standard
48070 Inserts a URL as described in section
48071 \begin_inset space ~
48075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48077 reference "subsec:URLs"
48084 \begin_layout Subsection
48088 \begin_layout Standard
48089 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
48090 \begin_inset space ~
48094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48096 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
48103 \begin_layout Subsection
48107 \begin_layout Standard
48108 Inserts a footnote as described in section
48109 \begin_inset space ~
48113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48115 reference "sec:Footnotes"
48122 \begin_layout Subsection
48126 \begin_layout Standard
48127 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
48128 \begin_inset space ~
48132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48134 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
48141 \begin_layout Subsection
48144 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
48147 \begin_layout Standard
48148 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
48149 environments of the same type.
48151 \begin_inset space ~
48155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48157 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
48161 for an explanation.
48164 \begin_layout Subsection
48168 \begin_layout Standard
48169 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
48170 title or caption of a float.
48171 Inserts a short title as described in section
48172 \begin_inset space ~
48176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48178 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
48185 \begin_layout Subsection
48190 \begin_layout Standard
48191 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
48192 Code box as described in section
48193 \begin_inset space ~
48197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48199 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
48206 \begin_layout Subsection
48208 \begin_inset Index idx
48213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48222 \begin_layout Standard
48223 Inserts a program listings box.
48224 Program listings are explained in the chapter
48226 Program Code Listings
48231 \begin_inset space ~
48239 \begin_layout Subsection
48241 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
48245 \begin_layout Standard
48247 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
48248 Inserts the actual date.
48249 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
48256 \begin_layout Subsection
48260 \begin_layout Standard
48261 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
48262 \begin_inset space ~
48266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48268 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48275 \begin_layout Section
48277 \begin_inset Index idx
48282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48284 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48301 \begin_layout Standard
48302 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
48303 \begin_inset space ~
48306 of the current document.
48307 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
48310 \begin_layout Subsection
48314 \begin_layout Standard
48315 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
48316 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
48317 to jump, for example, between section
48318 \begin_inset space ~
48322 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
48323 \begin_inset space ~
48326 2.5 and use the submenu
48329 \begin_inset space ~
48333 \begin_inset space ~
48340 \begin_inset space ~
48346 \begin_inset space ~
48350 \begin_inset space ~
48356 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
48360 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
48366 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
48369 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
48372 \begin_layout Standard
48374 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
48375 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
48381 \begin_inset space ~
48386 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
48389 \begin_inset space ~
48394 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
48397 \begin_layout Subsection
48398 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
48401 \begin_layout Standard
48402 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
48406 \begin_layout Subsection
48410 \begin_layout Standard
48411 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
48412 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
48413 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
48417 \begin_inset space ~
48421 \begin_inset space ~
48429 \begin_layout Subsection
48433 \begin_layout Standard
48434 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
48437 The \SpecialChar LyX
48438 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
48440 \begin_inset space ~
48448 \begin_inset space ~
48453 manual for a detailed description.
48456 \begin_layout Section
48458 \begin_inset Index idx
48463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48465 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48482 \begin_layout Subsection
48486 \begin_layout Standard
48487 Change Tracking is described in section
48488 \begin_inset space ~
48492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48494 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48501 \begin_layout Subsection
48509 \begin_layout Standard
48510 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
48511 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
48512 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48514 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
48515 to the clipboard or update the view.
48516 \begin_inset Newline newline
48519 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48523 \begin_layout Standard
48526 Open Containing Directory
48528 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
48529 's temporary folder for the document.
48530 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
48531 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
48532 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
48533 For example some journals require to send the
48537 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48541 \begin_layout Subsection
48542 Start Appendix Here
48545 \begin_layout Standard
48546 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
48547 as described in section
48548 \begin_inset space ~
48552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48554 reference "sec:Appendices"
48561 \begin_layout Subsection
48563 \begin_inset space ~
48569 \begin_layout Standard
48570 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
48571 default output format for the document (menu
48573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48574 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48575 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
48577 \begin_inset space ~
48581 \begin_inset space ~
48587 \begin_inset space ~
48591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48593 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
48597 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
48600 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48601 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48603 \begin_inset space ~
48606 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48608 \begin_inset space ~
48611 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48613 \begin_inset space ~
48617 \begin_inset space ~
48623 \begin_inset space ~
48627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48629 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48633 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
48634 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
48636 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48637 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48639 \begin_inset space ~
48642 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48647 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48651 \begin_inset space ~
48655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48657 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48662 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
48663 when it is first configured.
48664 The default output format is
48667 \begin_inset space ~
48675 \begin_layout Subsection
48676 View (Other Formats)
48679 \begin_layout Standard
48680 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
48681 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
48682 actual document with an external program.
48683 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
48684 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48685 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
48687 All possible formats are listed in section
48688 \begin_inset space ~
48692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48694 reference "subsec:Export"
48699 You should at least see the menu entry
48704 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48706 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
48708 \begin_inset space ~
48712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48714 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
48719 \begin_inset Index idx
48724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48725 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
48734 \begin_layout Standard
48735 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
48736 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
48738 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48739 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48741 \begin_inset space ~
48744 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48746 \begin_inset space ~
48749 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48753 \begin_inset space ~
48757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48759 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48764 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
48765 when it is first configured.
48768 \begin_layout Subsection
48770 \begin_inset space ~
48776 \begin_layout Standard
48777 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
48778 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
48781 \begin_layout Subsection
48782 Update (Other Formats)
48785 \begin_layout Standard
48786 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
48787 your document without opening a new viewer window.
48790 \begin_layout Subsection
48791 View Master Document
48794 \begin_layout Standard
48795 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
48797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48811 \begin_inset space ~
48816 manual for more information on this topic).
48817 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
48818 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
48822 \begin_inset space ~
48826 \begin_inset space ~
48831 generates the output of the whole book, while
48835 will just output the chapter alone.
48838 \begin_layout Standard
48839 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
48840 in the document settings (menu
48842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48843 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48844 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
48846 \begin_inset space ~
48850 \begin_inset space ~
48856 \begin_inset space ~
48860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48862 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
48866 ) or in the preferences (menu
48868 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48869 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48871 \begin_inset space ~
48874 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48876 \begin_inset space ~
48879 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48881 \begin_inset space ~
48885 \begin_inset space ~
48891 \begin_inset space ~
48895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48897 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48904 \begin_layout Subsection
48905 Update Master Document
48908 \begin_layout Standard
48909 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
48911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48925 \begin_inset space ~
48930 manual for more information on this topic).
48931 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
48932 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
48935 \begin_layout Standard
48936 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
48937 in the document settings (menu
48939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48940 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48941 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
48943 \begin_inset space ~
48947 \begin_inset space ~
48953 \begin_inset space ~
48957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48959 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
48963 ) or in the preferences (menu
48965 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48966 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48968 \begin_inset space ~
48971 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48973 \begin_inset space ~
48976 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48978 \begin_inset space ~
48982 \begin_inset space ~
48988 \begin_inset space ~
48992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48994 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49001 \begin_layout Subsection
49003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49005 name "subsec:Compressed"
49012 \begin_layout Standard
49013 Un/compresses the current document.
49014 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
49015 compression (see the
49017 Additional Features
49019 manual for details).
49022 \begin_layout Subsection
49026 \begin_layout Standard
49027 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
49030 \begin_layout Subsection
49034 \begin_layout Standard
49035 The document settings are described in appendix
49036 \begin_inset space ~
49040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49042 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
49049 \begin_layout Section
49051 \begin_inset Index idx
49056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49058 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49075 \begin_layout Subsection
49079 \begin_layout Standard
49080 Spell checking is explained in section
49081 \begin_inset space ~
49085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49087 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49094 \begin_layout Subsection
49098 \begin_layout Standard
49099 The thesaurus is described in section
49100 \begin_inset space ~
49104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49106 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
49113 \begin_layout Subsection
49115 \begin_inset Index idx
49120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49127 \begin_inset Index idx
49132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49141 \begin_layout Standard
49142 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
49143 the highlighted document part.
49146 \begin_layout Subsection
49152 \begin_inset Index idx
49157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49158 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
49167 \begin_layout Standard
49168 Generates with the help of the program
49170 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
49173 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
49174 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
49175 This feature is not available on Windows.
49178 \begin_layout Subsection
49184 \begin_inset Index idx
49189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49199 \begin_layout Standard
49200 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49205 \begin_inset space ~
49210 to see the full filename paths.
49213 \begin_layout Subsection
49215 \begin_inset Index idx
49220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49229 \begin_layout Standard
49230 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
49231 files as described in section
49232 \begin_inset space ~
49236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49238 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
49245 \begin_layout Subsection
49247 \begin_inset Index idx
49252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49255 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49265 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
49268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49269 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
49281 \begin_inset Index idx
49286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49287 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
49296 \begin_layout Standard
49297 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
49298 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
49299 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49300 -packages and programs it needs; see
49302 \begin_inset space ~
49306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49308 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
49315 \begin_layout Subsection
49319 \begin_layout Standard
49324 dialog as described in detail in appendix
49325 \begin_inset space ~
49329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49331 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49338 \begin_layout Section
49340 \begin_inset Index idx
49345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49347 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49364 \begin_layout Standard
49365 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
49366 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
49368 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
49372 \begin_layout Standard
49376 \begin_inset space ~
49381 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
49382 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49383 packages and classes found
49384 by \SpecialChar LyX
49386 \begin_inset space ~
49390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49392 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
49399 \begin_layout Standard
49403 \begin_inset space ~
49408 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
49413 \begin_layout Section
49415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49417 name "sec:Toolbars"
49424 \begin_layout Standard
49425 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
49426 \begin_inset space ~
49430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49432 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
49439 \begin_layout Standard
49440 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
49441 This is described in the
49443 Additional Features
49448 \begin_layout Subsection
49450 \begin_inset Index idx
49455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49457 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49474 \begin_layout Standard
49475 \begin_inset Graphics
49476 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
49484 \begin_layout Standard
49485 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49491 \begin_layout Standard
49492 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
49497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49509 \begin_inset Note Note
49512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49513 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
49518 manual for more information.
49526 \begin_layout Standard
49527 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49533 \begin_layout Standard
49534 \begin_inset Tabular
49535 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
49536 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49537 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49538 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49544 \begin_inset Graphics
49545 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
49555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49559 pull-down box for the environments
49572 \begin_layout Standard
49573 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
49579 \begin_layout Standard
49581 \begin_inset Tabular
49582 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
49583 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49584 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49585 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49609 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49639 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49669 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49685 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
49693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49699 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49715 arg "spelling-continuously"
49723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49727 Spellcheck continuously
49733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49756 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49786 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49816 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49846 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49876 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49878 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
49883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49901 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
49909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49915 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49941 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
49949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49955 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49983 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
49991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49997 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49998 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
50005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50026 Emphasize text, function of the
50027 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
50030 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50032 \begin_inset space ~
50035 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
50037 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
50043 arg "dialog-show character"
50054 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50075 Set text to noun style, function of the
50076 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
50079 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50081 \begin_inset space ~
50084 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
50086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
50092 arg "dialog-show character"
50103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50109 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
50112 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
50120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50125 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
50128 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50141 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
50146 arg "textstyle-apply"
50156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50161 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
50162 Format text using the current settings in the
50164 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50166 \begin_inset space ~
50169 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
50180 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50204 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
50206 \begin_inset space ~
50215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50224 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
50232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50252 arg "tabular-insert"
50260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50279 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
50282 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
50290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50295 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
50298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50314 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
50322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50326 Toggle outline window on/off,
50328 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50344 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
50352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50356 Toggle math toolbar on/off
50362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50371 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
50379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50383 Toggle table toolbar on/off
50396 \begin_layout Subsection
50398 \begin_inset Index idx
50403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50405 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50422 \begin_layout Standard
50423 \begin_inset Graphics
50424 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
50432 \begin_layout Standard
50433 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
50439 \begin_layout Standard
50440 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
50444 \begin_layout Standard
50445 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
50451 \begin_layout Standard
50452 \begin_inset Tabular
50453 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
50454 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
50455 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
50456 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
50457 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50493 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
50501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50520 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
50528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50547 arg "layout-toggle List"
50555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50574 arg "layout-toggle Description"
50582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50601 arg "depth-increment"
50609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50617 \begin_inset space ~
50621 \begin_inset space ~
50630 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50639 arg "depth-decrement"
50647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50653 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50655 \begin_inset space ~
50659 \begin_inset space ~
50668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50677 arg "float-insert figure"
50685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50692 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
50699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50708 arg "float-insert table"
50716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50723 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
50730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50769 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
50777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50799 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
50807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50813 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50845 \begin_inset space ~
50854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50863 arg "nomencl-insert"
50871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50879 \begin_inset space ~
50888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50897 arg "footnote-insert"
50905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50927 arg "marginalnote-insert"
50935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50943 \begin_inset space ~
50952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50976 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
50978 \begin_inset space ~
50987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50996 arg "box-insert Frameless"
51004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51072 \begin_inset space ~
51081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51090 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
51098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51105 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
51112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51121 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
51129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51136 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51138 \begin_inset space ~
51147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51156 arg "dialog-show character"
51164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51170 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51172 \begin_inset space ~
51175 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
51182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51188 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
51193 arg "textstyle-apply"
51201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51206 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
51207 Format text using the recent settings in the
51210 arg "dialog-show character"
51219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51228 arg "layout-paragraph"
51236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51244 \begin_inset space ~
51253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51262 arg "thesaurus-entry"
51270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51276 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51290 \begin_layout Subsection
51291 View/Update Toolbar
51292 \begin_inset Index idx
51297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51299 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51316 \begin_layout Standard
51317 \begin_inset Graphics
51318 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
51325 \begin_layout Standard
51326 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51332 \begin_layout Standard
51333 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
51337 \begin_layout Standard
51338 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51344 \begin_layout Standard
51345 \begin_inset Tabular
51346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
51347 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51348 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51349 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51389 arg "buffer-update"
51397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51419 arg "master-buffer-view"
51427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51435 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
51437 \begin_inset space ~
51443 \begin_inset space ~
51452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51461 arg "master-buffer-update"
51469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51477 \begin_inset space ~
51481 \begin_inset space ~
51490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51499 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
51507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51514 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51516 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
51518 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
51521 \SpecialChar menuseparator
51522 Synchronize with Output
51528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51539 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
51549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51556 View (Other Formats)
51562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51569 arg "update-others"
51573 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
51581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51587 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51588 Update (Other Formats)
51601 \begin_layout Standard
51603 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
51604 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
51610 \begin_layout Subsection
51614 \begin_layout Standard
51615 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
51616 \begin_inset space ~
51620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51622 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51626 , the table toolbar
51627 \begin_inset Index idx
51632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51634 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51651 \begin_inset space ~
51656 manual and the math macro toolbar
51657 \begin_inset Index idx
51662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51664 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51685 \begin_layout Chapter
51686 The Document Settings
51687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51689 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51694 \begin_inset Index idx
51699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51701 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51718 \begin_layout Standard
51722 \begin_inset space ~
51727 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
51728 is called with the menu
51730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51734 You can save your document settings as default with the
51736 Save as Document Defaults
51738 button in any dialog.
51739 This will create a template named
51743 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
51744 when you create a new document without
51748 \begin_layout Standard
51753 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
51754 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
51757 \begin_layout Standard
51758 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
51759 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
51760 to find the one you are looking for.
51761 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
51762 the submenus of the dialog.
51764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51768 \begin_inset space \space{}
51772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51779 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
51780 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
51781 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
51784 \begin_layout Section
51788 \begin_layout Standard
51789 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
51791 Document classes are described in section
51792 \begin_inset space ~
51796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51798 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
51805 \begin_layout Standard
51809 \begin_inset space ~
51814 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
51819 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
51820 as a layout for a document class.
51821 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
51823 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
51832 \begin_layout Standard
51833 Some classes use special class options by default.
51834 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
51838 and you can decide to use them or not.
51839 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
51840 recommended you leave them untouched.
51845 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51846 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
51851 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51853 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
51858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51859 When you want to use one of the following drivers
51860 \begin_inset Newline newline
51865 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
51868 \begin_inset Newline newline
51871 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51872 distribution, see section
51877 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51879 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
51892 \begin_layout Standard
51897 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
51898 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
51899 in the background if the child document
51900 is opened without its master.
51901 This way child documents are always compilable.
51902 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
51909 \begin_inset space ~
51917 \begin_layout Standard
51918 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51929 \begin_inset Index idx
51934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51952 \begin_inset Index idx
51957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51960 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51974 for cross-references, see section
51975 \begin_inset space ~
51979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51981 reference "sec:Cross-References"
51988 \begin_layout Section
51992 \begin_layout Standard
51993 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
51994 Please refer to the section
51997 \begin_inset space ~
52005 \begin_inset space ~
52010 manual for details.
52013 \begin_layout Section
52017 \begin_layout Standard
52018 Modules are explained in section
52019 \begin_inset space ~
52023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52025 reference "subsec:Modules"
52032 \begin_layout Section
52036 \begin_layout Standard
52038 \begin_inset space ~
52042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52044 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
52051 \begin_layout Section
52055 \begin_layout Standard
52056 The document font settings are described in section
52057 \begin_inset space ~
52061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52063 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
52070 \begin_layout Section
52074 \begin_layout Standard
52075 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
52087 \begin_inset space ~
52092 and whether it should be a
52095 \begin_inset space ~
52100 can also be specified here.
52103 \begin_layout Standard
52104 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
52105 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
52106 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
52108 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
52111 \begin_layout Standard
52114 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
52117 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
52118 justifies the text on screen.
52119 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
52121 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
52125 \begin_layout Standard
52127 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
52136 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
52141 \begin_layout Section
52145 \begin_layout Standard
52146 This dialog is described in sections
52147 \begin_inset space ~
52151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52153 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
52158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52160 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
52167 \begin_layout Section
52171 \begin_layout Standard
52172 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
52173 \begin_inset space ~
52177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52179 reference "subsec:Margins"
52186 \begin_layout Section
52188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52190 name "sec:Language-encodings"
52195 \begin_inset Index idx
52200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52202 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52219 \begin_layout Standard
52220 The document language and quote styles are set here.
52221 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52222 (the \SpecialChar LyX
52224 is always encoded in utf8).
52225 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
52226 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
52227 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
52228 -command is not known for
52229 a particular character).
52230 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
52234 \begin_layout Standard
52236 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
52237 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
52238 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
52239 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
52240 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
52241 's default encoding).
52242 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
52243 's Unicode support covers the
52244 characters of most scripts.
52245 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
52246 using one of the traditional, or
52247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52254 , encodings is necessary.
52257 \begin_layout Standard
52259 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
52261 provides support for these traditional encodings.
52264 Traditional (auto-selected)
52270 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
52271 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
52272 the given language(s).
52274 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
52278 \begin_layout Standard
52280 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
52281 If you use the option
52286 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
52289 If the document contains text in more than one language you
52290 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
52293 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52296 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
52297 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
52298 exactly one encoding.
52299 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
52304 \begin_layout Standard
52306 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
52307 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
52313 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
52314 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
52316 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
52320 \begin_layout Standard
52322 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
52323 Finally, you can also select
52327 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
52328 Note that this encoding is then used for
52333 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
52334 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
52338 \begin_layout Standard
52340 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52342 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
52346 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
52347 Do not load inputenc
52348 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52352 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
52354 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
52356 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52358 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
52359 in the next dropdown menu
52360 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52361 does what it states:
52362 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
52364 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
52366 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52367 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
52368 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52374 \begin_inset Index idx
52379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52381 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
52386 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52391 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
52405 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
52406 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
52407 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
52408 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
52409 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
52411 Note that this option is only available for the standard
52417 Traditional (auto-selected)
52424 \begin_layout Standard
52426 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
52428 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
52429 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
52430 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
52431 installation supports Unicode), choose
52432 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
52433 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
52434 is quite incomplete, so
52435 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
52440 (when \SpecialChar LyX
52441 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
52442 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
52443 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
52444 -commands is not used, because all
52445 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
52446 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52447 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52448 , two new alternative engines
52449 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
52451 Both engines support Unicode natively.
52453 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
52456 \begin_inset space ~
52464 \begin_inset space ~
52472 \begin_inset space ~
52478 \begin_inset space ~
52482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52484 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
52489 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
52493 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
52498 \begin_layout Standard
52502 \begin_inset space ~
52507 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52508 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
52510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52518 The possible settings are:
52521 \begin_layout Description
52522 Default uses the language package that is selected in
52524 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52525 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
52529 \begin_inset space ~
52533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52535 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
52542 \begin_layout Description
52543 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
52544 format you will use.
52545 In many cases this will be
52550 \begin_inset Index idx
52555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52558 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52573 If the newer package
52578 \begin_inset Index idx
52583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52586 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52600 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52601 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52602 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
52604 this package will be used instead of
52611 \begin_layout Description
52613 \begin_inset space ~
52624 would be more appropriate.
52627 \begin_layout Description
52628 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
52629 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
52633 (for German texts), type in
52636 \begin_inset Newline newline
52641 usepackage{ngerman}
52644 \begin_layout Description
52645 None will not use a language package.
52646 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
52649 \begin_layout Standard
52650 Here is a list with the important encodings:
52653 \begin_layout Description
52655 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
52657 \begin_inset space ~
52661 \begin_inset space ~
52665 \begin_inset space ~
52672 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52678 \begin_inset Index idx
52683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52686 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52701 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
52702 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
52703 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
52709 \begin_layout Description
52710 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
52712 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
52713 commands, which may result in a big
52714 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
52715 -commands are needed.
52717 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
52718 This is the same as the
52731 \begin_layout Description
52733 \begin_inset space ~
52737 \begin_inset space ~
52740 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
52743 \begin_layout Description
52745 \begin_inset space ~
52749 \begin_inset space ~
52752 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
52755 \begin_layout Description
52757 \begin_inset space ~
52760 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
52763 \begin_layout Description
52765 \begin_inset space ~
52769 \begin_inset space ~
52772 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
52773 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
52776 \begin_layout Description
52778 \begin_inset space ~
52782 \begin_inset space ~
52785 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
52789 \begin_layout Description
52791 \begin_inset space ~
52795 \begin_inset space ~
52798 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
52799 ISO-8859-13 encoding
52802 \begin_layout Description
52804 \begin_inset space ~
52808 \begin_inset space ~
52812 \begin_inset space ~
52815 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
52816 \begin_inset space ~
52822 \begin_layout Description
52824 \begin_inset space ~
52828 \begin_inset space ~
52832 \begin_inset space ~
52835 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
52836 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
52839 \begin_layout Description
52841 \begin_inset space ~
52845 \begin_inset space ~
52848 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
52849 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
52850 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52851 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
52852 \begin_inset space ~
52856 \begin_inset space ~
52862 \begin_layout Description
52864 \begin_inset space ~
52868 \begin_inset space ~
52871 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
52872 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
52873 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52875 should try to use the encoding Unicode
52876 \begin_inset space ~
52880 \begin_inset space ~
52886 \begin_layout Description
52888 \begin_inset space ~
52892 \begin_inset space ~
52895 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
52898 \begin_layout Description
52900 \begin_inset space ~
52904 \begin_inset space ~
52907 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
52910 \begin_layout Description
52912 \begin_inset space ~
52916 \begin_inset space ~
52919 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
52922 \begin_layout Description
52924 \begin_inset space ~
52927 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
52930 \begin_layout Description
52932 \begin_inset space ~
52935 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
52938 \begin_layout Description
52940 \begin_inset space ~
52944 \begin_inset space ~
52947 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
52950 \begin_layout Description
52952 \begin_inset space ~
52956 \begin_inset space ~
52962 \begin_layout Description
52964 \begin_inset space ~
52968 \begin_inset space ~
52971 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
52974 \begin_layout Description
52976 \begin_inset space ~
52980 \begin_inset space ~
52986 \begin_layout Description
52988 \begin_inset space ~
52992 \begin_inset space ~
52995 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53001 \begin_inset Index idx
53006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53009 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53023 , when using this, set the document language to
53028 \begin_layout Description
53030 \begin_inset space ~
53034 \begin_inset space ~
53037 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53042 , when using this, set the document language to
53045 \begin_inset space ~
53051 \begin_layout Description
53053 \begin_inset space ~
53057 \begin_inset space ~
53060 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53066 \begin_inset Index idx
53071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53074 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53088 , when using this, set the document language to
53093 \begin_layout Description
53095 \begin_inset space ~
53099 \begin_inset space ~
53102 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53107 , when using this, set the document language to
53112 \begin_layout Description
53114 \begin_inset space ~
53118 \begin_inset space ~
53121 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53126 , when using this, set the document language to
53131 \begin_layout Description
53133 \begin_inset space ~
53136 (EUC-KR) for Korean
53139 \begin_layout Description
53141 \begin_inset space ~
53145 \begin_inset space ~
53149 \begin_inset space ~
53152 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
53155 \begin_layout Description
53157 \begin_inset space ~
53161 \begin_inset space ~
53165 \begin_inset space ~
53168 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
53169 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
53170 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
53173 \begin_layout Description
53175 \begin_inset space ~
53179 \begin_inset space ~
53185 \begin_layout Description
53187 \begin_inset space ~
53191 \begin_inset space ~
53194 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
53195 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
53198 \begin_layout Description
53200 \begin_inset space ~
53204 \begin_inset space ~
53207 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53213 \begin_inset Index idx
53218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53221 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53235 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
53236 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
53238 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
53239 with the default encoding (
53241 Unicode (utf8) [default]
53247 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
53248 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
53253 \begin_layout Description
53255 \begin_inset space ~
53263 \begin_inset space ~
53266 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
53273 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
53276 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53283 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
53284 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
53286 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
53289 \begin_layout Description
53291 \begin_inset space ~
53295 \begin_inset space ~
53298 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53304 \begin_inset Index idx
53309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53312 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53327 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
53330 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
53332 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
53333 This used to be more comprehensive than
53336 \begin_inset space ~
53341 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
53346 \begin_layout Description
53348 \begin_inset space ~
53351 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53357 \begin_inset Index idx
53362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53381 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
53382 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
53384 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
53385 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
53386 with the default encoding (
53388 Unicode (utf8) [default]
53394 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
53395 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
53400 \begin_layout Description
53402 \begin_inset space ~
53406 \begin_inset space ~
53410 \begin_inset space ~
53413 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
53414 \begin_inset space ~
53420 \begin_layout Description
53422 \begin_inset space ~
53426 \begin_inset space ~
53430 \begin_inset space ~
53433 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
53434 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
53435 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
53439 \begin_layout Description
53441 \begin_inset space ~
53445 \begin_inset space ~
53449 \begin_inset space ~
53452 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
53453 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
53456 \begin_layout Section
53458 \begin_inset Index idx
53463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53465 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53480 \begin_inset Index idx
53485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53487 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53502 \begin_inset Index idx
53507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53509 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53524 \begin_inset Index idx
53529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53531 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53548 \begin_layout Standard
53549 Here you can alter the font color for the
53553 (default: black), for
53556 \begin_inset space ~
53561 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
53565 (default: white) and for
53568 \begin_inset space ~
53578 sets the color back to the default.
53581 \begin_layout Standard
53582 Clicking any button showing
53590 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
53591 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
53592 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
53593 later more quickly.
53596 \begin_layout Standard
53597 Note, if you change the
53600 \begin_inset space ~
53605 font color and use the option
53608 \begin_inset space ~
53613 in the document settings under
53616 \begin_inset space ~
53621 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
53622 \begin_inset space ~
53626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53628 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
53635 \begin_layout Standard
53636 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
53642 \begin_layout Standard
53646 \begin_inset space ~
53655 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
53658 \begin_inset space ~
53661 Code after a forced page break:
53664 \begin_layout Itemize
53665 For the page color:
53666 \begin_inset Newline newline
53673 pagecolor{color name}
53676 \begin_layout Itemize
53677 For the text color:
53678 \begin_inset Newline newline
53688 \begin_layout Standard
53689 You are restricted to one of
53725 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
53732 \begin_inset space ~
53738 \begin_inset Newline newline
53741 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
53742 names to refer to them:
53745 \begin_layout Itemize
53751 \begin_inset Newline newline
53756 page_backgroundcolor
53759 \begin_layout Itemize
53763 \begin_inset space ~
53769 \begin_inset Newline newline
53777 \begin_layout Itemize
53781 \begin_inset space ~
53787 \begin_inset Newline newline
53795 \begin_layout Itemize
53799 \begin_inset space ~
53805 \begin_inset Newline newline
53813 \begin_layout Standard
53814 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
53817 \begin_inset space ~
53825 \begin_inset space ~
53833 \begin_layout Section
53835 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
53839 \begin_layout Standard
53841 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
53842 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
53843 \begin_inset space ~
53847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53849 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
53857 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
53858 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
53861 \begin_layout Standard
53863 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
53864 Additionally, you can advise
53865 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
53868 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
53870 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
53871 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
53872 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
53875 \begin_layout Section
53879 \begin_layout Standard
53880 Here you can adjust the
53884 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
53888 as described in section
53889 \begin_inset space ~
53893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53895 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
53900 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
53904 \begin_layout Standard
53906 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
53907 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
53909 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
53910 this package can be used as well.
53911 The most common one are:
53914 \begin_layout Description
53916 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
53917 right Line numbers to the right margin
53920 \begin_layout Description
53922 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
53923 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
53927 \begin_layout Description
53929 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
53930 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
53933 \begin_layout Description
53935 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
53936 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
53939 \begin_layout Description
53941 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
53942 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
53945 \begin_layout Description
53947 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
53949 \begin_inset space ~
53952 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
53957 \begin_layout Section
53961 \begin_layout Standard
53962 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53968 \begin_inset Index idx
53973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53976 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53995 \begin_inset Index idx
54000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54003 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54022 \begin_inset Index idx
54027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54030 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54045 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54048 Sectioned bibliography
54050 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54056 \begin_inset Index idx
54061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54064 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54083 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
54084 Finally, you can select a document-specific
54088 for the generation of the bibliography.
54089 For a further description of these possibilities see section
54090 \begin_inset space ~
54094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54096 reference "sec:Bibliography"
54103 \begin_layout Section
54107 \begin_layout Standard
54108 Here you can define the
54112 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
54114 \begin_inset space ~
54118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54120 reference "sec:Index"
54127 \begin_layout Section
54131 \begin_layout Standard
54132 The PDF properties are explained in section
54133 \begin_inset space ~
54137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54139 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
54146 \begin_layout Section
54150 \begin_layout Standard
54151 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
54152 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54158 \begin_inset Index idx
54163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54166 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54185 \begin_inset Index idx
54190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54193 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54212 \begin_inset Index idx
54217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54220 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54239 \begin_inset Index idx
54244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54247 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54266 \begin_inset Index idx
54271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54274 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54293 \begin_inset Index idx
54298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54301 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54320 \begin_inset Index idx
54325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54328 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54347 \begin_inset Index idx
54352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54355 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54374 \begin_inset Index idx
54379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54382 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54401 \begin_inset Index idx
54406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54409 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54423 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
54426 \begin_layout Description
54427 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
54428 -errors in formulas,
54429 ensure that you have this enabled.
54432 \begin_layout Description
54433 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
54434 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
54435 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
54439 \begin_layout Description
54440 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
54443 \begin_inset space ~
54455 \begin_layout Description
54456 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
54459 \begin_inset space ~
54471 \begin_layout Description
54472 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
54483 \begin_layout Description
54484 mathtools is used for the math commands
54520 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
54527 \begin_layout Description
54528 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
54530 Chemical Symbols and Equations
54539 \begin_layout Description
54540 stackrel is used for the math command
54557 \begin_layout Description
54558 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
54561 \begin_layout Description
54562 undertilde is used for the math command
54570 Accents for one Character
54579 \begin_layout Section
54581 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
54583 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
54589 \begin_layout Standard
54591 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
54592 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
54595 \begin_layout Standard
54597 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
54598 The float placement options
54599 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
54602 are described in the section
54605 \begin_inset space ~
54609 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
54611 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
54619 \begin_inset space ~
54627 \begin_layout Section
54631 \begin_layout Standard
54632 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
54634 Program Code Listings
54639 \begin_inset space ~
54647 \begin_layout Section
54651 \begin_layout Standard
54652 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
54660 set to be used and set the
54665 The itemize environment is described in section
54666 \begin_inset space ~
54670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54672 reference "sec:Itemize"
54679 \begin_layout Standard
54680 You can furthermore specify a
54683 \begin_inset space ~
54688 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54689 command of the desired character.
54690 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
54697 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
54699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54703 \begin_inset space \space{}
54707 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
54717 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
54718 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
54721 \begin_layout Standard
54722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
54725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54730 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
54731 -packages in the preamble (menu
54734 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54735 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
54738 \begin_inset space ~
54744 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
54748 usepackage{textcomp}
54751 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
54755 usepackage{amssymb}
54765 \begin_layout Section
54769 \begin_layout Standard
54770 Branches are described in section
54771 \begin_inset space ~
54775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54777 reference "sec:Branches"
54784 \begin_layout Section
54786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54788 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
54795 \begin_layout Standard
54796 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
54799 \begin_layout Description
54801 \begin_inset space ~
54805 \begin_inset space ~
54808 Format: The format that is used when you enter
54809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54828 View Master Document
54829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54836 Update Master Document
54837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54844 menu or the toolbar.
54845 The default is set in
54847 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54848 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
54850 \begin_inset space ~
54853 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
54857 \begin_inset space ~
54861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54863 reference "sec:File-Formats"
54870 \begin_layout Description
54872 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
54874 \begin_inset space ~
54878 \begin_inset space ~
54882 \begin_inset space ~
54885 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
54890 option which is needed with some packages.
54891 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
54892 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
54895 \begin_layout Description
54897 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
54899 \begin_inset space ~
54903 \begin_inset space ~
54906 Options offers settings for the
54914 \begin_layout Itemize
54918 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
54920 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
54922 \begin_inset space ~
54928 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
54930 \begin_inset space ~
54934 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
54940 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
54942 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
54943 settings for the menu
54945 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
54949 \begin_inset space ~
54953 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
54956 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
54957 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
54962 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
54964 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
54966 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
54969 or a detailed description see section
54971 Reverse DVI/PDF search
54976 \begin_inset space ~
54982 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
54986 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
54990 \begin_layout Itemize
54992 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
54995 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
54997 determines whether so-called
54998 \begin_inset Quotes els
55002 \begin_inset Quotes ers
55006 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
55008 \begin_inset Quotes els
55012 \begin_inset Quotes ers
55015 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
55016 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
55017 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
55019 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
55021 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
55022 macros, you can uncheck this.
55023 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
55030 \begin_layout Description
55032 \begin_inset space ~
55036 \begin_inset space ~
55039 Options offers settings for the export format
55047 \begin_inset space ~
55052 will assure that the output follows exactly version
55053 \begin_inset space ~
55056 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
55060 \begin_inset space ~
55065 settings are described in detail in section
55067 Math Output in XHTML
55072 \begin_inset space ~
55081 \begin_inset space ~
55085 \begin_inset space ~
55090 is used for the size of equations in the output.
55093 \begin_layout Description
55095 \begin_inset space ~
55100 Save transient properties
55102 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
55103 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
55104 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
55108 \begin_layout Itemize
55109 the activation of change tracking
55112 \begin_layout Itemize
55113 the output of tracked changes
55116 \begin_layout Itemize
55117 the recording of the document directory path.
55120 \begin_layout Standard
55121 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
55122 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
55126 \begin_layout Section
55134 \begin_layout Standard
55135 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
55137 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
55139 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55141 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
55145 \begin_layout Standard
55146 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55147 -syntax is given in section
55148 \begin_inset space ~
55152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55154 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
55161 \begin_layout Chapter
55167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55169 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
55174 \begin_inset Index idx
55179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55188 \begin_layout Standard
55189 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
55191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
55195 It has the following submenus.
55198 \begin_layout Section
55202 \begin_layout Subsection
55206 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55207 User Interface File
55208 \begin_inset Index idx
55213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55215 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55230 \begin_inset Index idx
55235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55237 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55254 \begin_layout Standard
55255 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
55256 interface (ui) file.
55257 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
55265 \begin_layout Description
55270 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
55273 \begin_layout Description
55280 the menu entries in popup context menus
55283 \begin_layout Description
55288 specifies the toolbar buttons
55291 \begin_layout Standard
55292 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
55293 and edit the entries.
55296 \begin_layout Standard
55297 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
55309 entries must be finished with an explicit
55334 and in the case of the
55335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55347 The syntax for the entries is:
55350 \begin_layout Standard
55351 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
55357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55380 \begin_layout Standard
55382 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
55385 All the \SpecialChar LyX
55386 -functions are listed in the menu
55388 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
55390 \begin_inset space ~
55398 \begin_layout Standard
55399 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
55405 \begin_layout Standard
55406 For example, assuming you use the menu
55408 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
55411 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
55415 \begin_layout Standard
55416 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
55422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55440 \begin_layout Standard
55442 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
55446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55457 to have the sixth bookmark.
55460 \begin_layout Standard
55464 \begin_inset space ~
55469 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
55470 's toolbar buttons.
55471 The currently available icon sets are compared in
55472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55475 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
55483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55487 \begin_layout Standard
55490 Enable tool tips in main work area
55492 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
55496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55500 \begin_layout Standard
55505 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
55506 should display in the menu
55508 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
55510 \begin_inset space ~
55518 \begin_layout Subsection
55522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55526 \begin_layout Standard
55529 Restore window layouts and geometries
55532 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
55533 the last \SpecialChar LyX
55537 \begin_layout Standard
55540 Restore cursor positions
55542 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
55546 \begin_layout Standard
55549 Load opened files from last session
55551 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
55555 \begin_layout Standard
55558 Clear all session information
55560 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
55561 sessions (cursor positions, names
55562 of last opened documents, etc.).
55565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55569 name "subsec:Backup documents"
55574 \begin_inset Index idx
55579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55581 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55598 \begin_layout Standard
55601 Backup original documents when saving
55603 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
55604 it was saved the last time.
55605 It is stored in the
55608 \begin_inset space ~
55614 \begin_inset space ~
55618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55620 reference "sec:Paths"
55624 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
55627 \begin_inset space ~
55633 The backup file has the file extension
55634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55648 \begin_layout Standard
55651 Backup documents, every
55653 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
55656 \begin_layout Standard
55659 Save documents compressed by default
55661 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
55662 \begin_inset space ~
55666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55668 reference "subsec:Compressed"
55673 This applies to newly created documents only.
55674 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
55677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55678 Windows & work area
55681 \begin_layout Standard
55684 Open documents in tabs
55686 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
55690 \begin_layout Standard
55695 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
55700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55702 \begin_inset space ~
55706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55708 reference "sec:Paths"
55712 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
55719 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
55720 documents will be opened in the same running instance
55721 of \SpecialChar LyX
55723 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
55724 instance is created for each file.
55727 \begin_layout Standard
55730 Single close-tab button
55732 is checked, there will only be one close button (
55742 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
55743 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
55744 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
55748 \begin_layout Standard
55749 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
55752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55757 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
55758 before the change takes effect.
55766 \begin_layout Standard
55771 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
55773 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
55775 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
55779 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
55780 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
55781 and only want to close the view in once instance.
55784 \begin_layout Subsection
55786 \begin_inset Index idx
55791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55810 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
55817 \begin_layout Standard
55818 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
55822 \begin_layout Standard
55823 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
55826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55831 This section only deals with the fonts
55835 the \SpecialChar LyX
55837 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
55840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
55841 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
55852 \begin_layout Standard
55853 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
55870 (depends on the system) as its
55873 \begin_inset space ~
55889 \begin_layout Standard
55890 You can change the font size with the
55897 \begin_layout Standard
55902 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
55904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55907 points have the size of 1
55908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55912 \begin_inset space ~
55916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55918 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
55923 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
55924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55928 The sizes are explained in detail in section
55929 \begin_inset space ~
55933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55935 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
55942 \begin_layout Subsection
55944 \begin_inset Index idx
55949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55951 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55967 \begin_inset Index idx
55972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55991 \begin_layout Standard
55992 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
55993 by choosing an item in the
55994 list and selecting the
56001 \begin_layout Standard
56002 By checking the option
56006 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
56009 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
56010 \begin_inset space ~
56014 \begin_inset space ~
56019 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
56022 \begin_layout Subsection
56024 \begin_inset Index idx
56029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56031 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56048 \begin_layout Standard
56049 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
56053 \begin_layout Standard
56058 enables previewing snippets of your document.
56059 This feature is described in section
56060 \begin_inset space ~
56064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56066 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
56073 \begin_layout Standard
56074 Checking the option
56077 \begin_inset space ~
56081 \begin_inset space ~
56085 \begin_inset space ~
56090 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
56093 \begin_layout Section
56095 \begin_inset Index idx
56100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56102 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56119 \begin_layout Subsection
56123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56127 \begin_layout Standard
56130 Cursor follows scrollbar
56132 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
56136 \begin_layout Standard
56137 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
56138 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
56139 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
56142 \begin_layout Standard
56145 Scroll below end of document
56147 is self-explanatory.
56150 \begin_layout Standard
56151 In \SpecialChar LyX
56152 one can jump from word to word by pressing
56159 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
56161 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
56162 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
56163 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
56167 \begin_layout Standard
56169 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
56172 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
56174 is only relevant in documents that
56179 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
56188 markup) with this option selected.
56189 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
56191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56195 \begin_inset Quotes els
56199 \begin_inset Quotes ers
56203 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
56204 dissolving from insets.
56209 track changes, pasted text is
56214 \begin_inset Quotes els
56218 \begin_inset Quotes ers
56221 notwithstanding the state of this option.
56226 \begin_layout Standard
56229 Sort environments alphabetically
56231 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
56234 \begin_layout Standard
56237 Group environments by their category
56239 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
56242 \begin_layout Standard
56247 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
56256 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
56260 \begin_layout Standard
56262 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
56265 Search drive for cited files
56267 allows \SpecialChar LyX
56268 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
56271 \begin_inset space ~
56275 \begin_inset space ~
56279 \begin_inset space ~
56283 \begin_inset space ~
56286 Content\SpecialChar ldots
56289 context menu on a citation.
56293 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
56295 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
56298 field determines the search pattern.
56300 \begin_inset space ~
56304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56306 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
56315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56319 \begin_layout Standard
56320 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
56325 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
56326 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
56330 \begin_layout Subsection
56332 \begin_inset Index idx
56337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56344 \begin_inset Index idx
56349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56351 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56368 \begin_layout Standard
56373 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
56375 Several binding files are available, among them:
56378 \begin_layout Description
56379 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
56382 \begin_layout Description
56383 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
56395 \begin_layout Description
56396 mac.bind a set of bindings for
56399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56407 \begin_layout Standard
56408 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
56413 , and binding files for special languages.
56414 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
56415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56419 \begin_inset space \space{}
56423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56431 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
56432 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
56433 will try to use the appropriate binding
56437 \begin_layout Standard
56438 Some binding files, like
56442 , only have a limited scope.
56443 When looking at the end of the file
56447 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
56450 \begin_layout Standard
56454 \begin_inset space ~
56458 \begin_inset space ~
56463 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
56464 in the selected key binding file.
56467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56471 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
56476 \begin_inset Index idx
56481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56483 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56500 \begin_layout Standard
56501 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
56502 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
56503 functions and the bound shortcuts.
56504 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
56507 Show key-bindings containing
56510 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
56511 Insert there for example as keyword
56512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56519 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
56520 functions that contain
56521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56529 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
56530 All \SpecialChar LyX
56531 functions are also listed in the file
56536 that you will find in the
56543 \begin_layout Standard
56544 For example, to add the shortcut
56552 , select the function and press the
56557 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
56558 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
56561 \begin_layout Standard
56562 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
56563 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
56568 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
56570 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
56575 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
56578 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
56582 \begin_layout Standard
56583 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
56586 \begin_layout Standard
56587 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
56589 The syntax of the entries is:
56592 \begin_layout Standard
56598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56617 \begin_layout Standard
56618 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
56619 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
56620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56647 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
56648 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
56649 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
56650 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
56652 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
56656 , you needed to specify it as
56661 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
56664 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
56667 \begin_layout Subsection
56669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56671 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
56676 \begin_inset Index idx
56681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56688 \begin_inset Index idx
56693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56695 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56712 \begin_layout Standard
56713 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
56714 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
56715 provides keyboard maps.
56716 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
56717 is a Romanian one, you can enable
56720 \begin_inset space ~
56724 \begin_inset space ~
56729 and select the keyboard map file named
56736 \begin_layout Standard
56745 keyboard map and, if you use the
56749 bindings, you can select the first and second with
56752 arg "keymap-primary"
56758 arg "keymap-secondary"
56761 respectively or toggle between them with
56764 arg "keymap-toggle"
56770 \begin_layout Standard
56771 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
56774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56779 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
56788 \begin_layout Standard
56789 You can also specify the mouse
56791 Wheel scrolling speed
56794 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
56798 Middle mouse button pasting
56800 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
56801 inserts the content of the clipboard.
56804 \begin_layout Standard
56812 \begin_inset space ~
56816 \begin_inset space ~
56821 you can select a key for zooming.
56822 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
56825 \begin_layout Subsection
56829 \begin_layout Standard
56830 Input completion is described in section
56831 \begin_inset space ~
56835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56837 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
56844 \begin_layout Section
56846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56853 \begin_inset Index idx
56858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56865 \begin_inset Index idx
56870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56872 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56889 \begin_layout Standard
56890 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
56891 are normally determined during
56893 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
56896 \begin_layout Description
56898 \begin_inset space ~
56901 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
56902 's working directory.
56903 It is the default when you
56914 \begin_inset space ~
56922 \begin_layout Description
56924 \begin_inset space ~
56927 templates This directory
56928 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
56929 contains the templates that are shown
56930 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
56931 will be opened when you use the menu
56932 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
56937 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
56939 \begin_inset space ~
56943 \begin_inset space ~
56951 \begin_layout Description
56953 \begin_inset space ~
56956 files This directory
56957 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
56958 will be opened when you use the
56959 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
56960 contains the example files that are listed in
56963 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
56972 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
56974 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
56976 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
56982 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
56984 \begin_inset Newline newline
56988 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
56991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57000 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
57001 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
57011 \begin_layout Description
57013 \begin_inset space ~
57017 \begin_inset Index idx
57022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57038 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
57039 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
57040 \begin_inset space ~
57044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57046 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
57054 will be used to save the backups.
57055 \begin_inset Newline newline
57058 Backup files have the ending
57059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57069 \begin_layout Description
57071 \begin_inset space ~
57074 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
57075 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
57077 \begin_inset Newline newline
57084 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
57090 You can edit this file with the program
57099 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
57100 in its preferences under
57103 \begin_inset space ~
57109 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
57114 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
57116 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
57117 in your \SpecialChar LyX
57123 and \SpecialChar LyX
57124 need to be running the same time.
57125 \begin_inset Newline newline
57128 The pipe is also used for the
57132 feature, see section
57133 \begin_inset space ~
57137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57139 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
57144 \begin_inset Newline newline
57147 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
57148 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
57149 \begin_inset Newline newline
57165 \begin_layout Description
57167 \begin_inset space ~
57170 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
57173 \begin_layout Description
57175 \begin_inset space ~
57178 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
57179 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
57180 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
57183 \begin_layout Description
57185 \begin_inset space ~
57188 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
57194 You only need to specify it if you are using
57198 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
57200 For \SpecialChar LyX
57205 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
57209 \begin_layout Description
57211 \begin_inset space ~
57214 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
57215 When \SpecialChar LyX
57216 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
57217 to find it on the system.
57218 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
57220 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
57222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57229 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
57230 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
57233 \begin_layout Description
57235 \begin_inset space ~
57238 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
57239 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
57240 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
57241 code or in the document
57243 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
57245 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
57246 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
57247 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
57248 scanned for the input files.
57249 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
57250 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
57252 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
57253 compilation may fail for some documents.
57256 \begin_layout Section
57260 \begin_layout Standard
57261 Here you can insert your
57270 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
57272 \begin_inset space ~
57276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57278 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
57282 , to mark changes you make as yours.
57285 \begin_layout Section
57287 \begin_inset Index idx
57292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57294 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57309 \begin_inset Index idx
57314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57316 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57333 \begin_layout Subsection
57335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57337 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
57344 \begin_layout Description
57346 \begin_inset space ~
57350 \begin_inset space ~
57353 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
57355 You can find its actual translation status here:
57356 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57358 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
57364 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
57368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57370 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
57371 LaTeX Language Support
57376 \begin_layout Description
57378 \begin_inset space ~
57381 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
57382 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
57383 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
57384 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
57385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57401 The most widespread language package is
57406 \begin_inset Index idx
57411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57414 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57428 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
57430 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
57431 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
57432 come with the alternative
57438 \begin_inset Index idx
57443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57460 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
57461 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
57467 The available selections are described in section
57468 \begin_inset space ~
57472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57474 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
57481 \begin_layout Description
57483 \begin_inset space ~
57487 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
57488 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57489 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
57491 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
57495 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
57499 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
57501 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
57505 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
57506 that is used to switch to a different language
57507 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
57508 to start the package
57512 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
57513 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
57517 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
57518 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
57521 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
57525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
57533 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
57541 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
57544 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
57546 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
57550 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
57568 selectlanguage{$$lang}
57569 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
57576 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
57577 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57582 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
57587 , this setting is ignored.
57592 \begin_layout Description
57594 \begin_inset space ~
57598 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
57605 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
57606 Use this if the language switch set in
57610 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
57614 's alternative command
57618 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
57619 \SpecialChar allowbreak
57622 end{otherlanguage*}
57626 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
57627 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
57628 command toggles the package on and off
57629 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
57630 Empty by default, as
57634 selectlanguage{$$lang}
57636 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
57641 selectlanguage{$$lang}
57647 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
57652 , this setting is ignored.
57657 \begin_layout Description
57659 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
57661 \begin_inset space ~
57665 \begin_inset space ~
57668 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
57672 \begin_layout Description
57674 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
57676 \begin_inset space ~
57680 \begin_inset space ~
57683 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
57689 \begin_layout Description
57691 \begin_inset space ~
57695 \begin_inset space ~
57699 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
57701 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
57704 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
57705 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
57708 to the document class options
57709 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
57710 rather than the language package options.
57711 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
57715 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
57716 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
57718 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
57719 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
57721 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
57726 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
57727 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
57736 \begin_layout Description
57738 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
57740 \begin_inset space ~
57744 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
57746 \begin_inset space ~
57750 \begin_inset space ~
57754 \begin_inset space ~
57760 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
57762 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
57765 this option is set,
57766 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
57767 the language switch defined in
57770 \begin_inset space ~
57775 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
57776 to the document language.
57777 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
57778 This might be needed if you use a non-default
57781 \begin_inset space ~
57786 or if a package resets the document language.
57787 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
57788 usually should be the document language).
57789 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
57790 documents start with the chosen document language.
57791 When this option is not set, the
57794 \begin_inset space ~
57799 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57801 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
57804 \begin_inset space ~
57814 \begin_layout Description
57816 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
57818 \begin_inset space ~
57822 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
57824 \begin_inset space ~
57828 \begin_inset space ~
57832 \begin_inset space ~
57838 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
57842 \begin_inset space ~
57846 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
57847 Set document language explicitly
57853 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
57855 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
57861 \begin_inset space ~
57867 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
57869 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
57873 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
57875 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
57878 the end of the document.
57879 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
57883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57884 \paragraph_spacing single
57886 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
57892 \begin_layout Description
57894 \begin_inset space ~
57898 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
57900 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
57904 \begin_inset space ~
57908 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
57910 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
57912 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
57916 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
57919 in a language different
57920 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
57922 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
57925 the document language will be
57926 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
57927 marked (by default with a blue
57930 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
57932 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
57936 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
57940 \begin_layout Description
57942 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
57944 \begin_inset space ~
57948 \begin_inset space ~
57952 \begin_inset space ~
57955 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
57956 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
57957 switched via the operating system.
57958 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
57960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57963 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
57964 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
57969 \begin_layout Description
57971 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
57973 \begin_inset space ~
57977 \begin_inset space ~
57980 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
57981 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
57986 \begin_layout Description
57988 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
57990 \begin_inset space ~
57994 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
57996 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
58000 \begin_inset space ~
58004 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
58005 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
58006 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
58008 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
58012 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
58014 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
58015 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
58017 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
58018 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
58019 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
58021 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
58026 \begin_layout Standard
58031 means that the cursor
58032 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
58033 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
58034 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
58036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58039 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
58040 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
58044 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
58046 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
58047 specific case always means: move
58051 in text (even if this means:
58057 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
58058 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
58059 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
58060 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
58061 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
58062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58073 \begin_layout Standard
58075 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
58080 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
58081 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
58082 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
58086 ) when coming from the left.
58087 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
58089 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
58090 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
58091 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
58096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58098 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
58102 \begin_layout Description
58104 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
58106 \begin_inset space ~
58110 \begin_inset space ~
58113 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
58114 separator alignment).
58115 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
58117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58120 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
58121 (static) custom character here.
58124 \begin_layout Description
58126 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
58128 \begin_inset space ~
58132 \begin_inset space ~
58135 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
58141 \begin_layout Subsection
58145 \begin_layout Standard
58146 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
58147 \begin_inset space ~
58151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58153 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
58160 \begin_layout Section
58164 \begin_layout Subsection
58166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58168 name "subsec:General-output"
58175 \begin_layout Description
58177 \begin_inset space ~
58180 search Commands that will be used for the menu
58182 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
58184 \begin_inset space ~
58190 For a detailed description see section
58192 Reverse DVI/PDF search
58197 \begin_inset space ~
58205 \begin_layout Description
58207 \begin_inset space ~
58210 Options Options for the program
58214 that is used for the export format
58219 \begin_inset space ~
58223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58225 reference "subsec:Export"
58230 Possible options are listed in the
58235 \begin_inset Newline newline
58239 \begin_inset Flex URL
58242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58244 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
58254 \begin_layout Description
58256 \begin_inset space ~
58260 \begin_inset space ~
58263 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
58266 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58267 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
58269 \begin_inset space ~
58275 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
58278 \begin_layout Description
58280 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
58282 \begin_inset space ~
58286 \begin_inset Index idx
58291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58298 \begin_inset Index idx
58303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58305 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58319 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
58320 \begin_inset Newline newline
58324 \begin_inset Flex URL
58327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58329 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
58335 \begin_inset Newline newline
58338 For example the format
58339 \begin_inset Newline newline
58343 \begin_inset Newline newline
58346 prints the date as day/month/year.
58351 \begin_layout Description
58353 \begin_inset space ~
58357 \begin_inset space ~
58360 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
58361 is allowed to overwrite on export.
58364 \begin_layout Subsection
58370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58372 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
58377 \begin_inset Index idx
58382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58384 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58402 \begin_layout Description
58404 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
58406 \begin_inset space ~
58414 \begin_inset space ~
58418 \begin_inset space ~
58421 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
58426 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
58447 are used for Cyrillic.
58448 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
58449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58461 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
58463 sets up in the background.
58464 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
58469 \begin_layout Description
58471 \begin_inset space ~
58475 \begin_inset space ~
58479 \begin_inset space ~
58483 \begin_inset space ~
58486 options They only have an effect when the program
58490 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
58493 \begin_layout Standard
58494 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
58495 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
58496 manuals of the applications.
58499 \begin_layout Description
58501 \begin_inset space ~
58504 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
58505 \begin_inset space ~
58509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58511 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
58518 \begin_layout Description
58520 \begin_inset space ~
58523 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
58524 \begin_inset space ~
58528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58530 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
58537 \begin_layout Description
58539 \begin_inset space ~
58542 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
58543 \begin_inset space ~
58547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58549 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
58556 \begin_layout Description
58562 \begin_inset space ~
58565 command Command for the program
58567 Check\SpecialChar TeX
58570 that is described in the section
58572 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
58577 Additional Features
58582 \begin_layout Standard
58583 There are additionally the following options:
58586 \begin_layout Description
58588 \begin_inset space ~
58592 \begin_inset space ~
58596 \begin_inset space ~
58600 \begin_inset space ~
58605 \begin_inset space ~
58608 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
58609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58626 to separate folders.
58627 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
58629 \begin_inset Index idx
58634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58641 \begin_inset Index idx
58646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58648 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58665 \begin_layout Description
58667 \begin_inset space ~
58671 \begin_inset space ~
58675 \begin_inset space ~
58679 \begin_inset space ~
58683 \begin_inset space ~
58687 \begin_inset space ~
58690 changes Removes all manually set
58696 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
58697 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
58699 \begin_inset space ~
58704 dialog when changing the document class.
58707 \begin_layout Section
58709 \begin_inset space ~
58713 \begin_inset Index idx
58718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58727 \begin_layout Subsection
58729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58731 name "subsec:Converters"
58736 \begin_inset Index idx
58741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58750 \begin_layout Standard
58751 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
58752 from one format to another.
58753 You can modify converters or create new ones.
58754 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
58761 \begin_inset space ~
58766 field and press the
58771 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
58775 \begin_inset space ~
58780 drop-down list, modify the
58784 field and press the
58791 \begin_layout Standard
58794 Converter File Cache
58800 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
58802 Maximum Age (in days
58805 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
58806 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
58809 \begin_layout Standard
58810 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
58811 definition, is described in the section
58822 \begin_layout Subsection
58824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58826 name "sec:File-Formats"
58831 \begin_inset Index idx
58836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58843 \begin_inset Index idx
58848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58857 \begin_layout Standard
58858 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
58868 programs that should be used for certain formats.
58871 \begin_layout Standard
58872 You can also define the
58874 Default output format
58876 that is used when you use
58878 View, Update, View Master Document
58882 Update Master Document
58888 menu or the toolbar.
58891 \begin_layout Standard
58892 More about formats and their options is described in the section
58903 \begin_layout Standard
58904 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
58906 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
58907 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
58908 This is done by specifying a
58913 More about this is described in the section
58924 \begin_layout Chapter
58925 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
58927 \begin_inset Index idx
58932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58941 name "chap:Units-available-in"
58948 \begin_layout Standard
58950 \begin_inset space ~
58954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58956 reference "tab:Units"
58960 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
58961 and used in this documentation.
58964 \begin_layout Standard
58965 \begin_inset Float table
58972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58973 \begin_inset Caption Standard
58975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58991 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
58997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58999 \begin_inset Tabular
59000 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
59001 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
59002 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
59003 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
59004 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
59006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59157 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
59161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59428 scaled point (65536
59429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59496 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
59501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59620 % of original image width
59625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59709 \begin_layout Standard
59710 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
59713 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
59720 \begin_layout Bibliography
59721 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59722 LatexCommand bibitem
59729 The \SpecialChar LyX
59731 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59734 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
59740 \begin_inset Newline newline
59744 \begin_inset Flex URL
59747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59749 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
59757 \begin_layout Bibliography
59758 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59759 LatexCommand bibitem
59760 key "latexcompanion"
59765 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
59767 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
59768 Companion Second Edition.
59771 Addison-Wesley, 2004
59774 \begin_layout Bibliography
59775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59776 LatexCommand bibitem
59782 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
59785 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
59789 Addison-Wesley, 2003
59792 \begin_layout Bibliography
59793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59794 LatexCommand bibitem
59803 : A Document Preparation System.
59806 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
59809 \begin_layout Bibliography
59810 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59811 LatexCommand bibitem
59821 The \SpecialChar TeX
59825 Addison-Wesley, 1984
59828 \begin_layout Bibliography
59829 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59830 LatexCommand bibitem
59836 The \SpecialChar TeX
59838 \begin_inset Newline newline
59842 \begin_inset Flex URL
59845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59847 https://ctan.org/topic
59855 \begin_layout Bibliography
59856 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59857 LatexCommand bibitem
59863 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
59865 \begin_inset Newline newline
59869 \begin_inset Flex URL
59872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59874 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
59882 \begin_layout Bibliography
59883 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59884 LatexCommand bibitem
59891 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59893 name "Documentation"
59894 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
59901 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59905 \begin_inset Newline newline
59909 \begin_inset Flex URL
59912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59914 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
59922 \begin_layout Bibliography
59923 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59924 LatexCommand bibitem
59931 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59933 name "Documentation"
59934 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
59939 how to use the program
59941 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59945 \begin_inset Newline newline
59949 \begin_inset Flex URL
59952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59954 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
59962 \begin_layout Bibliography
59963 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59964 LatexCommand bibitem
59971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59973 name "Documentation"
59974 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
59979 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
59985 \begin_inset Index idx
59990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59993 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60008 \begin_inset Newline newline
60012 \begin_inset Flex URL
60015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60017 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
60025 \begin_layout Bibliography
60026 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60027 LatexCommand bibitem
60034 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60036 name "Documentation"
60037 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
60042 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60048 \begin_inset Index idx
60053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60056 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60071 \begin_inset Newline newline
60075 \begin_inset Flex URL
60078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60080 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
60088 \begin_layout Bibliography
60089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60090 LatexCommand bibitem
60097 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60099 name "Documentation"
60100 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
60110 \begin_inset Newline newline
60114 \begin_inset Flex URL
60117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60119 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
60127 \begin_layout Bibliography
60128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60129 LatexCommand bibitem
60130 key "makeindex-man"
60136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60139 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
60149 \begin_inset Newline newline
60153 \begin_inset Flex URL
60156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60158 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
60164 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
60168 \begin_layout Bibliography
60170 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
60171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60172 LatexCommand bibitem
60179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60181 name "Documentation"
60182 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
60192 \begin_inset Newline newline
60196 \begin_inset Flex URL
60199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60201 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
60203 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
60215 \begin_layout Bibliography
60216 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60217 LatexCommand bibitem
60224 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60226 name "Documentation"
60227 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
60237 \begin_inset Newline newline
60241 \begin_inset Flex URL
60244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60246 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
60254 \begin_layout Bibliography
60255 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60256 LatexCommand bibitem
60263 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60265 name "Documentation"
60266 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
60271 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
60273 \begin_inset Newline newline
60277 \begin_inset Flex URL
60280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60282 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
60290 \begin_layout Bibliography
60291 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60292 LatexCommand bibitem
60299 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60301 name "Documentation"
60302 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
60307 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60313 \begin_inset Index idx
60318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60321 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60336 \begin_inset Newline newline
60340 \begin_inset Flex URL
60343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60345 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
60353 \begin_layout Bibliography
60354 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60355 LatexCommand bibitem
60362 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60364 name "Documentation"
60365 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
60370 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60376 \begin_inset Index idx
60381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60384 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60399 \begin_inset Newline newline
60403 \begin_inset Flex URL
60406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60408 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
60416 \begin_layout Bibliography
60417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60418 LatexCommand bibitem
60425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60427 name "Documentation"
60428 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
60433 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60439 \begin_inset Index idx
60444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60447 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60462 \begin_inset Newline newline
60466 \begin_inset Flex URL
60469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60471 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
60479 \begin_layout Bibliography
60480 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60481 LatexCommand bibitem
60488 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60490 name "Documentation"
60491 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
60496 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60502 \begin_inset Index idx
60507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60510 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60525 \begin_inset Newline newline
60529 \begin_inset Flex URL
60532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60534 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
60542 \begin_layout Bibliography
60543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60544 LatexCommand bibitem
60551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60553 name "Documentation"
60554 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
60559 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60565 \begin_inset Index idx
60570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60573 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60588 \begin_inset Newline newline
60592 \begin_inset Flex URL
60595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60597 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
60605 \begin_layout Bibliography
60606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60607 LatexCommand bibitem
60614 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60616 name "Documentation"
60617 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
60622 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60628 \begin_inset Index idx
60633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60636 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60651 \begin_inset Newline newline
60655 \begin_inset Flex URL
60658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60660 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
60668 \begin_layout Bibliography
60669 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60670 LatexCommand bibitem
60677 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60679 name "Documentation"
60680 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
60685 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60691 \begin_inset Index idx
60696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60699 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60714 \begin_inset Newline newline
60718 \begin_inset Flex URL
60721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60723 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
60731 \begin_layout Bibliography
60732 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60733 LatexCommand bibitem
60740 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60742 name "Documentation"
60743 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
60748 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60754 \begin_inset Index idx
60759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60762 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60777 \begin_inset Newline newline
60781 \begin_inset Flex URL
60784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60786 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
60794 \begin_layout Bibliography
60795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60796 LatexCommand bibitem
60803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60806 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
60811 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60813 \begin_inset Newline newline
60817 \begin_inset Flex URL
60820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60822 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
60830 \begin_layout Bibliography
60831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60832 LatexCommand bibitem
60839 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60842 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
60847 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60849 \begin_inset Newline newline
60853 \begin_inset Flex URL
60856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60858 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
60866 \begin_layout Bibliography
60867 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60868 LatexCommand bibitem
60875 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60878 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
60883 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60884 for Cyrillic languages:
60885 \begin_inset Newline newline
60889 \begin_inset Flex URL
60892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60894 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
60902 \begin_layout Bibliography
60903 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60904 LatexCommand bibitem
60911 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60914 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
60919 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60921 \begin_inset Newline newline
60925 \begin_inset Flex URL
60928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60930 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
60938 \begin_layout Bibliography
60939 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60940 LatexCommand bibitem
60947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60950 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
60955 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60957 \begin_inset Newline newline
60961 \begin_inset Flex URL
60964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60966 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
60974 \begin_layout Bibliography
60975 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60976 LatexCommand bibitem
60983 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60986 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
60991 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60993 \begin_inset Newline newline
60997 \begin_inset Flex URL
61000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61002 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
61010 \begin_layout Standard
61011 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
61018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61045 \begin_inset Note Note
61048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61055 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
61056 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
61057 bibliography is the second one:
61065 \begin_layout Standard
61066 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
61067 LatexCommand bibtex
61068 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
61069 options "biblio/alphadin"
61076 \begin_layout Standard
61077 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
61081 \begin_layout Standard
61085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61091 pagedeclaration}[1]{
61094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61100 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
61108 \begin_inset Note Note
61111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61112 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
61113 \begin_inset space ~
61117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61119 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
61131 \begin_layout Standard
61132 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
61133 LatexCommand printnomenclature
61139 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
61140 LatexCommand printindex